Ford Automobile F350 User Manual

Table of Contents  
Table of Contents  
Introduction  
4
Instrument Cluster  
12  
Warning and control lights  
Gauges  
12  
15  
Entertainment Systems  
19  
AM/FM stereo  
19  
21  
23  
27  
31  
AM/FM stereo cassette  
AM/FM stereo cassette with CD  
AM/FM stereo with CD  
CD changer  
Climate Controls  
35  
Heater only  
Manual heating and air conditioning  
35  
36  
Lights  
38  
Headlamps  
Turn signal control  
Bulb replacement  
38  
41  
42  
Driver Controls  
48  
Windshield wiper/washer control  
Steering wheel adjustment  
Moon roof  
Power windows  
Mirrors  
Speed control  
Message center  
48  
49  
51  
52  
53  
56  
59  
1
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Maintenance and Specifications  
215  
Engine compartment  
Engine oil  
Battery  
Fuel information  
Air filter(s)  
Part numbers  
Refill capacities  
Lubricant specifications  
217  
218  
221  
229  
246  
253  
254  
257  
Accessories  
Index  
270  
274  
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical  
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval  
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written  
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without  
notice and without incurring obligation.  
Copyright © 2003 Ford Motor Company  
3
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Introduction  
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning  
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and  
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to  
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other  
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and  
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known  
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other  
reproductive harm.  
CONGRATULATIONS  
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get  
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more  
you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and  
pleasure you will derive from driving it.  
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the  
following website:  
In the United States: www.ford.com  
In Canada: www.ford.ca  
In Australia: www.ford.com.au  
In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx  
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.  
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available  
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your  
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe  
options before they are generally available.  
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is  
an integral part of the vehicle.  
Fuel pump shut-off switch In the event of an accident the  
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the  
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.  
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump  
shut-off switch in the Roadside emergencies chapter.  
4
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION  
Warning symbols in this guide  
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible  
damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment? In this guide, answers  
to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning  
triangle symbol. These comments should be read and observed.  
Warning symbols on your vehicle  
When you see this symbol, it is  
imperative that you consult the  
relevant section of this guide before  
touching or attempting adjustment  
of any kind.  
Protecting the environment  
We must all play our part in  
protecting the environment. Correct  
vehicle usage and the authorized  
disposal of waste cleaning and  
lubrication materials are significant  
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this  
guide with the tree symbol.  
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE  
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive  
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles) of  
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed to allow parts to adjust  
themselves to other parts.  
Drive your new vehicle for at least 800 km (500 miles) before towing a  
trailer or snowplowing.  
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during  
the first few thousand kilometers (miles) of operation, since these  
additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the  
Maintenance and specifications chapter for more information on oil  
usage.  
5
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
SPECIAL NOTICES  
Emission warranty  
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper  
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 7.3L  
Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible  
for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a  
detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to  
the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owners  
Guide.  
Data Recording  
Computers in your vehicle are capable of recording detailed data  
potentially including but not limited to information such as:  
the use of restraint systems including seat belts by the driver and  
passengers,  
information about the performance of various systems and modules in  
the vehicle, and  
information related to engine, throttle, steering, brake or other system  
status.  
Any of this information could potentially include information regarding  
how the driver operates the vehicle, potentially including but not limited  
to information regarding vehicle speed, brake or accelerator application,  
or steering input. This information may be stored during regular  
operation or in a crash or near crash event.  
This stored information may be read out and used by:  
Ford Motor Company.  
service and repair facilities.  
law enforcement or government agencies.  
others who may assert a right or obtain your consent to know such  
information.  
6
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Special instructions  
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic  
controls.  
Please read the section Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)  
in the Seating and safety restraints chapter. Failure to follow  
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.  
Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should  
NEVER be used in front of a passenger side air bag unless the  
air bag can be and is turned OFF.  
Notice to owners of diesel-powered vehicles  
Read the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owners  
Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation and  
maintenance of your Diesel-powered light truck.  
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles  
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than  
other types of vehicles.  
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owners Guide carefully.  
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,  
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle  
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.  
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.  
7
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Using your vehicle with a snowplow  
For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a  
snowplow, refer to the Driving chapter.  
Using your vehicle as an ambulance  
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation  
Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance  
manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete  
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s Layout Book and the  
Qualified Vehicle Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as pertinent  
supplements. For additional information, please contact the Truck Body  
Builders Advisory Service 18778404338.  
Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford  
Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited  
Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties. In addition, ambulance  
usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody  
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which  
could lead to fires.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the  
Ford Ambulance Preparation  
Package, it will be indicated on the  
Certification label. The label is  
located on the drivers side door  
pillar or on the rear edge of the  
drivers door. You can determine  
whether the ambulance  
manufacturer followed Fords  
recommendations by directly  
contacting that manufacturer. Ford  
Ambulance Preparation Package is  
only available on certain 6.0L Diesel  
engine equipped vehicles.  
8
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Notice to owners with vehicles equipped with Power Take Off  
(PTO) capability  
Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for  
operating vehicles equipped with PTO.  
Middle East/North Africa vehicle specific information  
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with  
features and options that are different from the ones that are described  
in this Owner Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that  
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided  
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations  
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this Owner  
Guide for all other required information and warnings.  
9
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.  
Vehicle Symbol Glossary  
Safety Alert  
See Owners Guide  
Air Bag-Front  
Child Seat  
Fasten Safety Belt  
Air Bag-Side  
Child Seat Installation  
Warning  
Child Seat Lower  
Anchor  
Child Seat Tether  
Anchor  
Brake System  
Brake Fluid -  
Non-Petroleum Based  
Anti-Lock Brake System  
Traction Control  
AdvanceTrac  
Master Lighting Switch  
Fog Lamps-Front  
Hazard Warning Flasher  
Fuse Compartment  
Windshield Wash/Wipe  
Fuel Pump Reset  
Windshield  
Rear Window  
Defrost/Demist  
Defrost/Demist  
10  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Vehicle Symbol Glossary  
Power Window Lockout  
Interior Luggage  
Power Windows  
Front/Rear  
Child Safety Door  
Lock/Unlock  
Compartment Release  
Symbol  
Panic Alarm  
Engine Oil  
Engine Coolant  
Temperature  
Engine Coolant  
Do Not Open When Hot  
Battery  
Avoid Smoking, Flames,  
or Sparks  
Battery Acid  
Fan Warning  
Explosive Gas  
MAX  
MIN  
Maintain Correct Fluid  
Level  
Power Steering Fluid  
Emission System  
Engine Air Filter  
Jack  
Passenger Compartment  
Air Filter  
Check fuel cap  
Low tire warning  
11  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Instrument Cluster  
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES  
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may  
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may  
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicles functions.  
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the  
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the  
respective system inspected immediately.  
Service engine soon: The Service  
engine soon indicator light  
illuminates when the ignition is first  
turned to the ON position to check  
the bulb. Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On  
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to  
On board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could  
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid  
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced  
immediately.  
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures  
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior  
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.  
Check fuel cap (if equipped):  
Illuminates when the fuel cap may  
not be properly installed. Continued  
driving with this light on may cause  
the Service engine soon warning  
light to come on. Refer to Fuel  
filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
12  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Check gage: Illuminates when any  
of the following conditions has  
occurred:  
CHECK  
GAGE  
The engine coolant temperature  
is high.  
The engine oil pressure is low.  
The fuel gauge is at or near empty.  
Brake system warning light: To  
confirm the brake system warning  
light is functional, it will  
momentarily illuminate when the  
ignition is turned to the ON position when the engine is not running, or  
in a position between ON and START, or by applying the parking brake  
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the brake system  
warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek service immediately  
from your dealership. Illumination after releasing the parking brake  
indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected  
immediately by your servicing dealership.  
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is  
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may  
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle  
checked by your dealer immediately.  
Anti-lock brake system: If the  
ABS light stays illuminated or  
ABS  
continues to flash, a malfunction has  
been detected, have the system  
serviced immediately. Normal  
braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is  
illuminated.  
Air bag readiness: If this light fails  
to illuminate when ignition is turned  
to ON, continues to flash or remains  
on, have the system serviced  
immediately. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the  
supplemental restraint system has been detected.  
13  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten  
your safety belt. A chime will also  
sound to remind you to fasten your  
safety belt.  
Charging system: Illuminates when  
the battery is not charging properly.  
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel  
level in the fuel tank is at or near  
empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this  
chapter).  
Speed control: Illuminates when  
the speed control is activated. Turns  
off when the speed control system  
is deactivated.  
Transmission Tow/Haul Feature  
(5–speed automatic  
transmission) (if equipped): The  
ON light on the end of the gearshift  
lever illuminates when the Tow/Haul  
feature has been selected. Refer to the Driving chapter for transmission  
function and operation. If the light flashes steadily, have the system  
serviced immediately, damage to the transmission could occur.  
Transmission control indicator  
light (TCIL) (4–speed automatic  
OVERDRIVE  
transmission) (if equipped):  
Illuminates when the overdrive  
function of the transmission has  
been turned OFF, refer to the Driving chapter. If the light flashes  
steadily, have the system serviced immediately, damage to the  
transmission could occur.  
Four wheel drive low  
LOW  
RANGE  
(if equipped): Illuminates when  
four-wheel drive low is engaged.  
14  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Four wheel drive indicator  
(if equipped): Illuminates when  
four-wheel drive is engaged.  
4x4  
Door ajar: Illuminates when the  
ignition is in the ON position and  
any door is open.  
Turn signal: Illuminates when the  
left or right turn signal or the  
hazard lights are turned on. If the  
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.  
High beams: Illuminates when the  
high beam headlamps are turned on.  
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the  
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACC position and the drivers door is  
opened.  
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking  
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the  
drivers door is opened.  
Parking brake ON warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake  
is set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than  
5 Km (3 mph).  
GAUGES  
15  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Speedometer: Indicates the  
current vehicle speed.  
Engine coolant temperature  
gauge: Indicates engine coolant  
temperature. At normal operating  
temperature, the needle will be in  
the normal range (between Hand  
C). If it enters the red section,  
the engine is overheating. Stop  
the vehicle as soon as safely  
possible, switch off the engine  
and let the engine cool.  
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is  
running or hot.  
Odometer: Registers the total  
kilometers (miles) of the vehicle.  
Trip odometer: Registers the  
kilometers (miles) of individual  
journeys. Press the control once to  
switch from the odometer to the  
trip odometer. To reset the trip,  
D
D
P RN 2  
press the control again until the trip reading is 0.0 miles.  
Tachometer: Indicates the engine  
speed in revolutions per minute.  
Driving with your tachometer  
pointer continuously at the top of  
the scale may damage the engine.  
16  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Battery voltage gauge (manual  
transmission only): Indicates the  
battery voltage when the ignition is  
in the ON position. If the pointer  
moves and stays outside the normal  
operating range (as indicated by  
arrows), have the vehicles electrical  
system checked as soon as possible.  
Engine oil pressure gauge:  
Indicates engine oil pressure. The  
needle should stay in the normal  
operating range (between Land  
H). If the needle falls below the  
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn  
off the engine and check the engine  
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil  
level is correct, have your vehicle  
checked at your dealership or by a  
qualified technician.  
Fuel gauge: Indicates  
approximately how much fuel is left  
in the fuel tank (when the ignition  
is in the ON position). The fuel  
gauge may vary slightly when the  
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.  
Refer to Filling the tank in the  
Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter for more information.  
17  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Transmission fluid temperature gauge (automatic transmission  
only): If the gauge is in the:  
White area (normal) - the  
transmission fluid is within the  
normal operating temperature  
(between Hand C).  
Yellow area (warning) the  
transmission fluid is higher than  
normal operating temperature. This  
can be caused by special operation  
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing  
or off road use). Refer to Special  
Operating Conditions in the  
scheduled maintenance guide for  
instructions. Operating the  
transmission for extended periods of  
time with the gauge in the yellow  
area may cause internal transmission damage.  
Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower  
the transmission temperature into the normal range.  
Red area (over temperature) —  
the transmission fluid is overheating.  
Stop the vehicle to allow the  
temperature to return to normal  
range.  
If the gauge is operating in the  
Yellow or Red area, stop the vehicle  
and verify the airflow is not  
restricted such as snow or debris  
blocking airflow through the grill. If  
the gauge continues to show high  
temperatures, see your Ford dealer.  
18  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Entertainment Systems  
AM/FM STEREO  
5
6
7
1
2
VOL  
PUSH  
ON  
ST DX  
FM  
TONE VOL  
SEEK  
TUNE  
TONE  
CLK  
12  
1
2
3
4
AM/FM  
3
4
1. Seek: Press  
/
to find the  
next strong station down/up the  
frequency band.  
2. Tune: Press  
/
to manually  
change radio frequency down/up.  
3. AM/FM: Press to choose a  
frequency band in radio mode.  
AM/FM  
19  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
4. Memory preset buttons: To set  
a station: Select frequency band  
1
2
3
4
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and  
hold a preset button until sound returns.  
5. Power/volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF; turn to increase or  
decrease volume levels.  
VOL  
PUSH  
ON  
6. Tone: Press TONE until the  
desired level Bass, Treble, Fade  
appears on the display. Turn the  
volume control to raise/lower the  
levels, or to move the audio sound  
from the right to left or the front to  
back (if equipped).  
TONE  
CLK  
7. CLK (Clock): To set the hour,  
press and hold CLK until CLOCK  
SET appears in the display. Press  
TONE  
CLK  
SEEK to decrease  
increase the hours.  
To set the minute, press and hold CLK until CLOCK set appears in the  
display. Press TUNE to decrease or increase the minutes.  
or  
20  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
AM/FM STEREO CASSETTE  
12  
13 14 15 16 17  
1
2
3
4
VOL - PUSH ON  
ST  
CLK  
AM  
FM  
FM1  
BASS  
TREB  
BAL  
FADE  
TAPE  
AMS  
11  
SEEK  
TUNE  
SIDE  
REW  
1 - 2  
FF  
SCAN  
EJ  
10  
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
7
8
1. Balance: Press to shift sound to  
the left/right speakers.  
2. Fade: Press to shift sound to the  
rear/front speakers.  
3. CLK: To set the hour, press and  
hold CLK. Then press SEEK to  
CLK  
decrease  
hours.  
or increase  
the  
To set the minute, press and hold CLK and press TUNE to decrease  
or increase the minutes.  
21  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
TAPE  
AMS  
4. Tape AMS: In tape mode, press  
and hold to activate Automatic  
Music Search (allows you to quickly  
locate the beginning of the tape selection being played or to skip to the  
next selection). Then, press REW (for the beginning of the current  
selection) or FF (to advance to the next selection). The tape MUST have  
a blank section of at least four seconds duration between programs.  
5. Side 12: Press to change tape  
direction.  
SIDE  
1 - 2  
6. REW (rewind): Press to rewind  
the tape.  
REW  
FF (fast forward): Press to  
advance the tape.  
FF  
7. Memory preset buttons: To set  
a station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,  
press and hold a preset button until sound returns.  
8.  
Dolbynoise reduction: Works in tape mode only. Reduces tape  
noise and hiss; press to activate/deactivate.  
9. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a brief  
sampling of all listenable radio  
stations or all tape selections. Press  
again to stop.  
10. Tune: Works in radio mode only.  
Press TUNE  
/
to change  
frequency down/up  
11. Seek: Press and  
release  
/
for previous/next  
strong station, selection or track.  
12. Power/volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF; turn to increase or  
decrease volume levels.  
22  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
13. AM/FM: Press to choose a  
frequency band in radio mode.  
14. Bass: Press  
/
to  
decrease/increase the bass output.  
15. Treble: Press  
/
to  
decrease/increase the treble output.  
16. EJ (Eject): Press to eject a  
tape.  
EJ  
17. Cassette door: Insert a cassette into the cassette door.  
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD  
23  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
1. Power/volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF; turn to increase/decrease  
volume.  
2. Scan: Press to hear a brief  
sampling of all listenable stations,  
tape selections or CD tracks. Press  
again to stop.  
SCAN  
3. CD Door: Insert a CD with the  
label side up.  
CD units are designed to play  
commercially pressed 12 cm  
(4.75 in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical  
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact  
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.  
Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film  
attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should  
not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause  
the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade  
CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than  
adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact  
your dealer for further information.  
4. Cassette door: Insert the  
cassette with the opening to the  
right.  
5. Eject: Press to eject the  
cassette/CD. The radio will resume  
playing.  
6. Tape: Press to start tape play.  
Press to stop tape during  
rewind/fast forward.  
24  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
CD: Press to start CD play. With the  
dual media audio, press CD to  
toggle between single CD and CD  
changer play (if equipped).  
7. Mute: Press to MUTE playing  
media; press again return to playing  
media.  
8. Auto: Press to set first six  
strongest stations (if available) into  
AM, FM1 or FM2 memory buttons;  
press again to return to normal  
stations.  
9. Clock: Press and hold to set the  
clock. Press the  
SEEK to  
decrease hours or SEEK  
increase hours. Press the  
to decrease minutes or TUNE  
to  
TUNE  
to  
increase minutes. If your vehicle has a stand alone clock this control will  
not function.  
10. Balance: Press BAL; then press  
SEL  
/
to shift sound to the  
left/right speakers.  
Fade: Press FADE; then press  
SEL  
/
to shift sound to the  
rear/front speakers.  
11. Memory preset buttons: To  
set a station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM, tune to a station, press and  
hold a preset button until sound returns.  
25  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
12. Shuffle (CD): Press to play  
tracks in random order.  
13. Compression (CD): Press to  
bring soft and loud passages  
together for a more consistent  
listening level.  
14.  
Dolbynoise reduction:  
Works in tape mode only. Reduces  
tape noise and hiss; press to  
activate/deactivate.  
The Dolbynoise reduction system is manufactured under license from  
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbyand the double-D  
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing  
Corporation.  
15. Side 12: Works in tape mode  
only. Press to play reverse side of  
the tape.  
16. Fast Forward (FF): Press for  
FF  
2
a slow advance, press and hold for a  
fast advance.  
17. Rewind (REW): Press for a  
REW  
1
slow rewind, press and hold for a  
fast rewind.  
18. Select (SEL): Use with Bass,  
Treble, Balance and Fade controls.  
SEL  
19. Bass: Press BASS; then press  
SEL  
/
to decrease/increase  
the bass output.  
26  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Treble: Press TREB; then press  
SEL to decrease/increase  
/
the treble output.  
20. Tune: Works in radio mode only.  
SEEK  
TUNE  
Press TUNE  
/
to change  
frequency down/up.  
21. Seek: Press and release  
SEEK for previous/next  
/
strong station, selection or track.  
SEEK  
TUNE  
22. AM/FM: Press to select  
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.  
PREMIUM IN-DASH SIX CD SOUND SYSTEM  
27  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
1. Seek: Press and release  
SEEK  
/
for previous/next  
strong station, or track of current  
disc.  
2. Rewind: Press for a slow rewind,  
press and hold for a fast rewind.  
Fast forward: Press for a slow  
advance, press and hold for a fast  
advance.  
3. Comp (Compression): In CD mode, press to adjust the soft and loud  
passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press the COMP  
control until COMP ON is displayed.  
4. Mute: Press to MUTE playing  
media; press again return to playing  
media. In CD mode, MUTE acts as a  
pause feature.  
5. Eject: Press to eject a CD. Press  
and hold to auto eject all loaded  
discs.  
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press  
SEL  
/
to decrease/increase  
the bass output.  
Treble: Press TREB; then press  
SEL  
/
to decrease/increase  
the treble output.  
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,  
Balance and Fade controls to adjust  
levels. Use with MENU to set the  
clock and engage RDS.  
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press  
SEL  
/
to shift sound to the  
left/right speakers.  
28  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Fade: Press FADE; then press  
SEL to shift sound to the  
/
rear/front speakers.  
9. Menu: Press MENU and SEL to  
access clock mode, RDS on/off,  
Traffic, Program type, Show type  
and Compression modes.  
Traffic: Allows you to hear traffic broadcasts. With the feature ON, press  
SEEK or SCAN to find a station broadcasting a traffic report (if it is  
broadcasting RDS data). Traffic information is not available in most  
U.S. markets.  
FIND Program type: Allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a  
certain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies,  
R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.  
Show TYPE: Displays the stations call letters and format.  
Compression: Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more  
consistent listening level.  
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT  
MINUTE is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase (  
) or decrease  
(
) the hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.  
10. Memory presets: To set a  
station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and  
hold a preset button until sound  
returns. In CD mode, press to move between CDs.  
This radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls which  
allow you to set up to six AM stations and 12 FM stations (six in FM1  
and six in FM2).  
11. CD: Press to select CD mode.  
Seamless play: In CD mode, the  
transition between the end of one  
CD and the beginning of another will not contain delay time unless SEEK  
or a preset control is pressed.  
12. AM/FM: Press to select a  
frequency band in radio mode.  
29  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Autostore: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without  
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Press  
and momentarily hold AM/FM. AUTOSTORE will flash on the display.  
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1  
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system  
will store the last one in the remaining presets. Press again to disengage.  
13. Power/volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF; turn to increase or  
decrease volume levels.  
14. Load: Press to load a CD. Press  
and hold to load up to six discs.  
15. Shuffle: Press to play tracks in  
random order. Press SHUF to cycle  
through SHUF TRAC, SHUF DISC or  
SHUF OFF.  
16. Scan: Press to hear a brief  
sampling of all listenable stations or  
CD tracks. Press again to stop.  
17. Disc/Tune: Radio: Press  
or  
the frequency band.  
CD: Press or  
to manually tune down or up  
to select the previous or next track on the CD.  
18. CD door: Insert a CD label side  
up.  
30  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
CD CHANGER (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your CD changer is in one of the following locations:  
Behind the passengers seat  
In the center console  
Under the rear bench on the drivers side (see instructions below)  
In the stowage bin on the passengers side  
1. Slide the door to access the CD  
changer magazine.  
2. Press  
to eject the magazine.  
3. Turn the magazine (A) over.  
B
A
4. Using the disc holder release  
knob (C), pull the disc holder (B)  
out of the magazine.  
C
Do not pull too hard on the disc holder as the disc holder may come  
completely out of the magazine. If this happens, reinsert the disc holder  
back into the magazine while pressing on the lever.  
5. Line up the CD with the groove  
of the disc holder. Ensure that the  
label on the CD faces downwards.  
6. Press the disc holder until it locks  
securely into the magazine.  
31  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Ensure that the disc holder is  
evenly inserted and at the same  
level as the magazine (A). The unit  
will not operate if the disc holder is  
not inserted at the same level (B).  
A
B
If your CD changer is located under the rear bench, the following  
instructions apply to load discs:  
1. Load the discs into the magazine  
6
5
4
slots (numbered 1 through 6 on the  
6 COMPACT DISC MAGAZINE  
3
2
1
window) one at a time with labeled  
surfaces upward. (The holders DO  
NOT pull out. )  
2. Begin with the bottom slot number 1.  
3. Insert the loaded magazine into the CD changer with the arrow  
pointing toward the changer.  
To remove discs:  
1. Slide the corresponding lever on the opposite side of the magazine  
window. The disc will partially eject.  
2. Remove the disc.  
Radio power must be turned on to play the CDs in the changer. The  
magazine may be stored in the glove box when not being used.  
The CD magazine may be inserted or ejected with the radio power off.  
ONLY use the magazine supplied with the CD changer, other types will  
damage the unit.  
Keep the CD changer door closed. Coins and foreign objects will damage  
the CD player and void your audio system warranty.  
RADIO FREQUENCIES  
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications  
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:  
AM - 530, 5401700, 1710 kHz  
FM- 87.7, 87.9107.7, 107.9 MHz  
32  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS  
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:  
Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the  
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.  
Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,  
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.  
Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal  
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency  
is displayed.  
CASSETTE/PLAYER CARE  
Do:  
Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.  
Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole  
and turning the hub.  
Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.  
Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or  
cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.  
Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after  
1012 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.  
Dont:  
Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.  
Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being  
played.  
33  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
CD/CD PLAYER CARE  
Do:  
Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.  
Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner  
and wipe from the center out.  
Dont:  
Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods  
of time.  
Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.  
Clean using a circular motion.  
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75  
in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,  
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not  
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular  
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs  
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted  
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to  
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be  
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive  
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your  
dealer for further information.  
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE  
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If  
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.  
34  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
Climate Controls  
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM  
(IF EQUIPPED)  
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls  
the volume of air circulated in the  
vehicle.  
2. Temperature selection:  
Controls the temperature of the  
airflow in the vehicle.  
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the  
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.  
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.  
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.  
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the  
floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and  
floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.  
Operating tips  
To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place  
the air flow selector in the  
position.  
To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm  
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.  
Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in  
OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to breathe”  
using the outside air inlet vents.  
Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air  
flow to the back seats.  
Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of  
the windshield.  
35  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:  
1. Select  
2. Set the temperature control to full heat  
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.  
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows  
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents  
located in the middle of the instrument panel.  
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these  
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.  
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR  
CONDITIONING SYSTEM  
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls  
the volume of air circulated in the  
vehicle.  
2. Temperature selection:  
Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle.  
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the  
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.  
MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the  
instrument panel vents only.  
A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the instrument  
panel vents only.  
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.  
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.  
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the  
floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and  
floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.  
36  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
Operating tips  
To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place  
the air flow selector in the position.  
To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the  
air flow selector in the OFF or MAX A/C position.  
Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in  
MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle  
to breatheusing the outside air inlet vents.  
Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the  
airflow to the back seats.  
Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of  
the windshield.  
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:  
1. Select  
2. Select A/C  
3. Modulate the temperature control to maintain comfort.  
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.  
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows  
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents  
located in the middle of the instrument panel.  
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these  
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.  
37  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Lights  
HEADLAMP CONTROL  
Turns the lamps off.  
Turns on the parking lamps,  
instrument panel lamps, license  
plate lamps and tail lamps.  
Turns the headlamps on.  
Autolamp control (if equipped)  
The autolamp system provides light  
sensitive automatic on-off control of  
the exterior lights normally  
controlled by the headlamp control.  
The autolamp system also keeps the  
lights on for approximately 20  
seconds after the ignition switch is  
turned to OFF.  
To change the delay time of the  
autolamp feature, do the following:  
1. Start with the ignition in OFF and the autolamps selected.  
2. Deselect the autolamps.  
3. Put the ignition in RUN.  
4. Put the ignition in OFF.  
5. Select the autolamps. Steps 2 through 5 must be performed within a  
10 second period. At this point, the headlamps and parking lamps will  
turn on.  
6. Deselect the autolamps after the desired autolamp delay time  
(maximum of 3 minutes). At this point, the headlamps and parking  
lamps will turn off.  
38  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Foglamp control (if equipped)  
The headlamp control also operates  
the foglamps. The foglamps can be  
turned on only when the headlamp  
control is in the  
,
or  
position and the high beams are not  
turned on.  
Pull headlamp control towards you  
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp  
indicator light  
will illuminate when the switch is pulled and the  
parklamps are on.  
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)  
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.  
To activate:  
the ignition must be in the ON position and  
the headlamp control is in the OFF, parking lamp or autolamp  
position.  
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during  
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system  
does not activate with your tail lamps and generally may not provide  
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your  
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.  
High beams  
Push the lever toward the  
instrument panel to activate. Pull  
the lever towards you to deactivate.  
39  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Flash to pass  
Pull toward you slightly to activate  
and release to deactivate.  
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL  
Use to adjust the brightness of the  
instrument panel and all applicable  
switches in the vehicle during  
headlamp and parklamp operation.  
Move the control to the full upright  
position, past detent, to turn on the  
interior lamps.  
Move the control to the full down  
position, past detent, to prevent the interior lights from illuminating  
when the doors are opened.  
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS  
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.  
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps  
should be checked by a qualified service technician.  
40  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL  
Push down to activate the left  
turn signal.  
Push up to activate the right turn  
signal.  
COURTESY/READING LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)  
The dome lamp lights when the  
control is in the DOOR (left)  
position, any door is open, the  
instrument panel switch is pushed  
past the detent and when any of the  
remote entry controls are pressed  
while the ignition is off.  
The reading lamps can be turned on  
by pressing the rocker controls next  
to each lamp.  
41  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
MAP LAMPS  
With trip computer  
Without trip computer  
To turn on the map lamps, press the control next to each lamp.  
BULBS  
Replacing exterior bulbs  
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.  
Using the right bulbs  
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs  
must be marked with an authorized D.O.T.for North America and an  
Efor Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern  
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly  
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn  
time.  
42  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Function  
Number of  
Trade number  
bulbs  
Headlamps (aerodynamic)  
Headlamps (sealed beam)  
Park/turn  
Sidemarker  
Tail/stop/turn/sidemarker  
Backup  
High-mount stoplamp  
Foglamp  
License plate lamp  
Cargo lamp  
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
5
4
4
3
9007  
H6054  
3157  
194  
3157 K  
3156K  
921  
899  
168  
906  
194  
(a)  
Roofmarker  
Rear fender clearance*  
Interior visor lamp (if equipped)  
Rear identification  
194  
194  
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.  
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer  
(a)  
Replace entire lamp assembly; bulb is not serviceable.  
* Dual rear wheels or if equipped.  
Replacing headlamp bulbs (aerodynamic)  
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position open the  
hood.  
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward.  
3. Remove bulb retainer ring by  
turning it counterclockwise, then  
slide the ring off the plastic base  
4. Pull bulb out of headlamp  
assembly.  
43  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of  
childrens reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do  
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to  
break the next time the headlamps are operated.  
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.  
Replacing headlamp bulbs (sealed beam)  
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position and open the hood.  
2. Remove the two screws and  
parking lamp/side marker assembly  
by pulling gently  
3. Disconnect the electrical  
connectors from the parking  
lamp/side marker assembly and  
remove.  
4. Remove the four bolts and  
headlamp bezel.  
5. Remove the four screws and the  
headlamp retaining ring from  
headlamp.  
6. Disconnect the electrical  
connector and remove headlamp.  
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.  
44  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Replacing front parking/turn signal bulbs  
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position and open the hood.  
2. Remove the two screws and  
carefully disengage parking  
lamp/turn signal assembly from the  
vehicle.  
3. Rotate bulb socket  
counterclockwise and remove from  
lamp assembly.  
4. Carefully pull bulb straight out of  
the socket and push in the new  
bulb.  
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.  
Replacing tail lamp/turn/backup lamp bulbs — F250/F350 only  
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is  
in the OFF position and then open  
the tailgate to expose the lamp  
assemblies.  
2. Remove the two bolts from the  
tail lamp assembly and carefully pull  
the lamp assembly from the tailgate  
pillar by releasing the two retaining  
tabs.  
45  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp  
assembly.  
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.  
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.  
Replacing brake/tail/backup lamp bulbs F450/F550 only  
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is  
in the OFF position.  
2. Remove the four screws and the  
lamp lens from lamp assembly.  
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight  
out of the socket and push in the  
new bulb.  
Replacing cargo lamp and high-mount brakelamp bulbs  
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is  
in the OFF position.  
2. Remove the two screws and lamp  
assembly from vehicle as wiring  
permits.  
3. Remove the bulb socket by  
rotating counterclockwise.  
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the  
socket.  
46  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Replacing roof marker bulbs  
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is  
in the OFF position.  
2. Remove the screw and lens from  
the lamp assembly.  
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the  
socket.  
Replacing foglamp bulbs (if equipped)  
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is  
in the OFF position.  
2. Remove the bulb socket from the  
foglamp by turning  
counterclockwise.  
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the foglamp bulb.  
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.  
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs  
The license plate bulbs are located  
behind the rear bumper. To change  
the license plate lamp bulbs:  
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to  
locate the bulb.  
2. Twist the bulb socket  
counterclockwise and carefully pull  
to remove it from the lamp  
assembly.  
3. Pull out the old bulb from the  
socket and push in the new bulb.  
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.  
47  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Driver Controls  
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER  
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end  
of the control away from you to  
increase the speed of the wipers;  
rotate towards you to decrease the  
speed of the wipers.  
Windshield washer: Push the end  
of the stalk:  
briefly: causes a single swipe of  
the wipers without washer fluid.  
a quick push and hold: the wipers  
will swipe three times with  
washer fluid.  
a long push and hold: the wipers  
and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds.  
Changing the wiper blades  
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the  
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle  
from the wiper arm. Push the lock  
pin manually to release the blade  
and pull the wiper blade down  
toward the windshield to remove it  
from the arm.  
2. Attach the new wiper to the  
wiper arm and press it into place  
until a click is heard.  
3. Replace wiper blades every 6 months for optimum performance.  
48  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)  
To adjust the steering wheel:  
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel  
release control toward you.  
2. Move the steering wheel up or  
down until you find the desired  
location.  
3. Release the steering wheel  
release control. This will lock the  
steering wheel in position.  
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.  
TRANSMISSION CONTROL  
Tow/Haul feature  
(5speed automatic  
transmission) (if equipped)  
To activate, press the transmission  
control switch (TCS) located on the gearshift. The ON indicator light will  
illuminate on the gearshift. The transmission will operate in all gears.  
Press the transmission control switch again to deactivate Tow Haul  
mode. When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will  
automatically return to normal mode with Tow Haul feature deactivated.  
Overdrive cancel  
(4speed automatic  
transmission) (if equipped)  
To deactivate overdrive, press the  
transmission control switch (TCS)  
located on the gearshift. The OFF indicator light will illuminate on the  
gearshift. The transmission will operate in all gears except overdrive.  
Press the transmission control switch again to return to normal overdrive  
mode. When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will  
automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode.  
For additional information about the gearshift and the transmission  
control switch operation refer to the Driving chapter.  
49  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)  
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the  
visor mirror lamps.  
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)  
The appearance of your vehicles overhead console will vary according to  
your option package.  
Storage compartment (if equipped)  
Press the OPEN control to open the  
storage compartment. The door will  
open slightly and can be moved to  
full open.  
The storage compartment may be  
used to secure sunglasses or a  
similar object.  
Install a garage door opener (if equipped)  
The storage compartment can be used to hold a variety of aftermarket  
garage door openers. To install your garage door opener:  
1. Open the storage compartment  
door.  
2. Remove the storage clip and stow  
it away.  
3. Place the Velcrostrip onto the  
back of the garage door opener  
control.  
4. Adhere the back of garage door  
opener control to the Velcrostrip  
found inside the storage  
compartment. Make sure that the controls for the garage door opener  
face outward.  
50  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
5. Place the height adjusters onto  
the back of the storage  
compartment door. Add as many  
adjusters needed to activate the  
garage door opener.  
6. Close the storage compartment  
door and press the garage door  
opener control to verify that it  
works. If not, you may need to add  
more adjusters.  
One-touch moon roof (if equipped)  
With trip computer  
Without trip computer  
To open the moon roof using the one-touch operation switch:  
Press and release the rear portion of the one-touch moon roof control.  
To halt motion at any point during one-touch opening, press the  
control a second time.  
To close the moon roof:  
Press and hold the front portion of the moon roof control. Release the  
control to stop the roof closing at any position.  
51  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
To tilt the moon roof:  
To tilt into the vent position (when the glass panel is closed), press  
and hold the front portion of the moon roof control. To close from the  
vent position, press and hold the rear portion of the control until the  
glass panel stops moving.  
Sliding shade:  
The moon roof has a built-in sliding shade that can be manually  
opened or closed when the glass panel is shut.  
To close the shade, pull it toward the front of the vehicle.  
When closing the moon roof, you should verify that it is free of  
obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the  
proximity of the moon roof opening.  
AUXILIARY POWER POINT  
Power outlets are designed for  
accessory plugs only. Do not  
hang any type of accessory or  
accessory bracket from the plug.  
Improper use of the power  
outlet can cause damage not  
covered by your warranty.  
POWER POINT  
The auxiliary power point is located  
on the instrument panel.  
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette  
lighter. Use the power point.  
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)  
When closing the power  
windows, you should verify  
they are free of obstructions and  
ensure that children and/or pets  
are not in the proximity of the  
window openings.  
Press and hold the bottom part of the rocker switch to open the window.  
Press and hold the top part of the rocker switch to close the window.  
52  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
One touch down  
Allows the drivers window to open  
fully without holding the control  
down. Press completely down on  
AUTO and release quickly. Press  
again to stop.  
Window lock (if equipped)  
The window lock feature allows only  
the driver to operate the power  
windows.  
To lock out all the window controls  
except for the drivers press the left  
side of the control. Press the right  
side to restore the window controls.  
Accessory delay (if equipped)  
With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten  
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until  
any door is opened.  
POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)  
To adjust your mirrors:  
1. Select L to adjust the left mirror  
or R to adjust the right mirror.  
2. Move the control in the direction  
you wish to tilt the mirror.  
3. Return to the center position to  
disable the adjust function.  
53  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Heated outside mirrors  
(if equipped)  
The main mirror glass is heated  
automatically to remove ice, mist  
and fog and activates when the  
vehicle is started.  
Note: The mirrors may be hot to  
the touch but will not burn. This is  
a normal condition.  
The mirror heating elements are  
designed to operate regardless of  
the geographic location of the  
vehicle. There is no switch to turn on, or other operator involvement  
required other than to start the vehicle.  
The spotter mirror, below the main mirror, is not heated and must be  
adjusted manually.  
Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to  
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions  
could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.  
Signal mirrors (if equipped)  
Mirror mounted side turn signal indicator (if equipped)  
When the vehicle turn signals are  
activated, the outer portion of the  
mirror housing will blink amber.  
The turn signal feature can be seen  
by other drivers who may approach  
from the rear of the vehicle.  
54  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Clearance lamps (if equipped)  
Illuminates when the headlamps or  
parking lamps are switched on.  
This provides additional visibility of  
your vehicle to other drivers on the  
road.  
Fold-away mirrors  
The mirrors can be manually folded forward or backwards for narrow  
spaces like driving through an automatic car wash or backing out of a  
garage with the trailer tow mirror.  
The telescoping feature (if equipped) allows the mirror to extend  
approximately 76 mm (3 inches). This feature is especially useful to the  
driver when towing a trailer.  
55  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)  
The accelerator and brake pedal  
should only be adjusted when the  
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift  
lever is in the P (Park) position.  
Press and hold the rocker control to  
adjust accelerator and brake pedal  
toward you or away from you.  
The adjustment allows for approximately 73 mm (3 inches) of maximum  
travel.  
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the  
pedals while the vehicle is moving.  
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)  
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 48 km/h (30 mph)  
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed  
control does not work at speeds below 48 km/h (30 mph).  
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that  
are winding, slippery or unpaved.  
Setting speed control  
The controls for using your speed  
control are located on the steering  
wheel for your convenience.  
1. Press the ON control and release  
it.  
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.  
56  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
3. Press the SET ACCEL control  
and release it.  
4. Take your foot off the accelerator  
pedal.  
5. The indicator light on the  
instrument cluster will turn on.  
COAST  
Note:  
Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a  
steep hill.  
If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you  
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.  
If the vehicle speed decreases more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below  
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.  
Resuming a set speed  
Press the RES (resume) control and  
release it. This will automatically  
return the vehicle to the previously  
set speed. The RES control will not  
work if the vehicle speed is not  
COAST  
faster than 48 km/h (30 mph).  
Increasing speed while using speed control  
There are two ways to set a higher  
speed:  
Press and hold the SET ACCEL  
control until you get to the  
desired speed, then release the  
COAST  
control. You can also use the SET  
ACCEL control to operate the  
Tap-Up function. Press and  
release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in increments by  
1.6 km/h (1 mph).  
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the  
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET ACCEL control.  
57  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Reducing speed while using speed control  
There are two ways to reduce a set  
speed:  
Press and hold the COAST  
control until you get to the  
desired speed, then release the  
control. You can also use the  
COAST control to operate the  
Tap-Down function. Press and  
COAST  
release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in increments by  
1.6 km/h (1 mph).  
Depress the brake pedal until the  
desired vehicle speed is reached,  
press the SET ACCEL control.  
COAST  
Turning off speed control  
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:  
Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped). This will  
not erase your vehicles previously set speed.  
Press the speed control OFF  
control.  
Note: When you turn off the speed  
control or the ignition, your speed  
control set speed memory is erased.  
Indicator light (if equipped)  
This light comes on when either the  
SET ACCEL or RES controls are  
pressed. The vehicle speed must be  
at or above 48 km/h (30 mph). It  
turns off when the speed control  
OFF control is pressed, the brake or  
clutch is applied, or the ignition is turned to the OFF position.  
58  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These  
include:  
Utility compartment with  
cassette/CD holder  
Coin holder  
Pen holder  
Writing surface  
Use only soft cups in the  
cupholder. Hard objects can  
injure you in a collision.  
CELL PHONE USE  
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly  
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,  
drivers must not compromise their own or otherssafety when using  
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety  
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency  
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications  
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.  
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular  
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in vehicle communications  
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.  
A drivers first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.  
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to  
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to  
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.  
TRIP COMPUTER (IF EQUIPPED)  
The trip computer tells you about the condition of your vehicle through  
a constant monitor of vehicle systems. You may select display features on  
the trip computer for a display of status.  
The appearance of your vehicles trip computer may differ depending on  
your vehicles option package, but the functions are the same.  
The trip computer only operates with the ignition in the ON position.  
Trip computer features are as follows:  
59  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Selectable features  
English/metric display  
Press this control to change the trip  
computer display between metric  
and English units.  
Mode control  
Each press of the MODE control will  
display a different feature as follows:  
Average fuel economy. The  
display will indicate the vehicles  
average fuel economy in liters/100  
km (or miles/gallon) since the  
average fuel economy was last reset.  
If you calculate your average fuel  
economy by dividing liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled (miles  
traveled by gallons used), your figure may be different than displayed for  
the following reasons:  
your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up  
differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at  
service stations  
variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another  
rounding of the displayed values to the nearest liter (gallon)  
To reset the average fuel economy:  
1. Press the MODE control repeatedly until average fuel economy is  
displayed (this is the only resettable display).  
60  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
2. Press the E/M and MODE  
controls simultaneously. The display  
will illuminate the AVGindicator.  
While the indicator is lit, release  
both controls to reset the average  
fuel economy.  
Fuel range. This function estimates approximately how far you can  
drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving  
conditions. Remember to turn the ignition OFF when refueling to allow  
this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.  
The DTE function will flash for 5 seconds when you have approximately:  
80 km (50 miles) left before you run out of fuel  
40 km (25 miles)  
16 km (10 miles)  
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based  
on your recent driving history of 800 km (500 miles). This value is not  
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel  
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is  
disconnected.  
Outside air temperature  
The temperature can be displayed in  
Centigrade or Fahrenheit by  
pressing the E/M control.  
If the outside temperature falls  
below 3°C (38°F), the display will  
alternate from ICEto the outside  
temperature at a two second rate  
for one minute.  
Off. In this mode the display is off.  
61  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Compass  
The compass display is contained in the overhead console. The vehicle  
heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW.  
The compass heading is displayed in average fuel economy modes, fuel  
range modes and temperature modes.  
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large  
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antennas.  
Magnetic or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect  
compass accuracy. Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and  
calibration of the compass.  
Compass zone adjustment  
1. Determine which magnetic zone  
you are in for your geographic  
location by referring to the zone  
3 2  
4
1
15  
map.  
14  
13  
2. Locate the trip computer on the  
overhead console.  
5
12  
3. Turn ignition to the ON position.  
6
7 8 91011  
4. Press and hold both trip  
computer controls. After  
approximately four seconds, the trip  
computer will enter zone setting  
mode. Zone setting mode is  
indicated when the display lights the  
ZONEindicator.  
5. Release both controls.  
Subsequent pressing of either control will increment the zone. Press the  
control repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your geographic  
location is displayed on the trip computer.  
6. To exit the zone setting mode and save the displayed zone in memory,  
release both controls for greater than five seconds.  
62  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Compass calibration adjustment  
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and  
high voltage lines.  
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air  
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.  
1. Locate the trip computer located in the overhead console.  
2. Start the vehicle.  
3. Press and hold both trip  
computer controls. After  
approximately eight seconds, the  
trip computer will enter CAL mode.  
CAL mode is indicated when the  
display lights the CALindicator.  
4. Release both controls. The display  
will return to normal, except that  
the CAL indicator will remain lit until the compass is successfully  
calibrated.  
5. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) until  
the CAL indicator turns off. It may take up to five circles to complete  
calibration.  
6. The compass is now calibrated.  
63  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
TAILGATE LOCK (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a  
tailgate lock designed to prevent  
theft of the tailgate.  
Insert ignition key and turn to the  
right to engage lock.  
Turn ignition key to the left to  
unlock.  
Tailgate removal  
Your tailgate is removable to allow  
more room for loading.  
1. Lower the tailgate.  
2. Use a screwdriver to pry the  
spring clip (on each connector) past  
the head of the support screw.  
Disconnect cable.  
3. Disconnect the other cable.  
4. Lift tailgate to a 45 degree angle.  
5. Lift right side off of its hinge.  
6. Lift left side off of its hinge.  
To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.  
64  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Locks and Security  
KEYS  
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement  
keys are available from your dealer.  
You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case  
you require it in an emergency.  
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)  
Press control to unlock all doors.  
Press control to lock all doors.  
Smart locks (if equipped)  
This feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your  
key is still in the ignition.  
When you open the drivers door and you lock the vehicle with the  
power door locks, all the doors will lock, then the drivers door will  
automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition.  
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the  
manual lock button on the door, locking the drivers door with a key, or  
using the lock button on the remote entry transmitter (if equipped).  
65  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Childproof door locks  
When these locks are set, the  
rear doors cannot be opened from  
the inside.  
The rear doors can be opened  
from the outside when the doors  
are unlocked.  
The childproof locks are located on  
rear edge of each rear door and  
must be set separately for each  
door. Setting the lock for one door  
will not automatically set the lock  
for both doors.  
Move lock control up to engage  
the childproof lock.  
Move control down to disengage  
childproof locks.  
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of  
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device  
must accept any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void the users authority to  
operate the equipment.  
66  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:  
unlock the vehicle doors without  
a key.  
lock all the vehicle doors without  
a key.  
activate the personal alarm.  
If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle,  
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the dealership, to  
aid in troubleshooting.  
Unlocking the doors  
1. Press  
and release to unlock the drivers door. Note: The interior  
lamps will illuminate.  
2. Press  
doors.  
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the  
Locking the doors  
1. Press  
and release to lock all the doors. The parking lamps will flash  
if all the doors are closed and locked.  
2. Press  
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the  
doors are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn  
will chirp once, and the parking lamps will flash once more.  
If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick  
chirps.  
Power door lock disable feature (if equipped)  
The UNLOCK  
feature on your power door locks will not work from  
inside the vehicle when:  
the ignition has been turned to the OFF position, and  
20 seconds elapse after all vehicle doors are closed and locked using  
the remote entry transmitter, or the power door lock control (while  
the accompanying door is open).  
67  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
The UNLOCK  
feature will work again after:  
a door has become ajar,  
the ignition is turned to the ON position,  
or using the UNLOCK  
control on your remote entry transmitter (if  
equipped).  
This feature is initially deactivated, but may be activated by taking your  
vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer.  
Sounding a panic alarm  
Press  
to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to ACC  
or ON to deactivate.  
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the OFF  
position.  
Replacing the battery  
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium  
battery CR2032 or equivalent. The typical operating range for your  
remote entry transmitter is approximately 10 meters (33 feet). A  
decrease in the operating range could be caused by:  
weather conditions,  
nearby radio towers,  
structures around the vehicle and  
other vehicles parked next to the vehicle.  
To replace the battery:  
1. Twist a thin coin between the two  
halves of the remote entry  
transmitter near the key ring. DO  
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER  
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE  
FRONT HOUSING OF THE  
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.  
68  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the  
battery terminals on the back  
surface of the circuit board.  
3. Remove the old battery.  
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry  
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery  
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing  
cavity.  
5. Snap the two halves back together.  
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter  
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter  
should operate normally after battery replacement.  
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters  
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed  
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry  
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all  
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for  
reprogramming.  
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters  
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)  
available before beginning this procedure.  
69  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
To reprogram the remote entry  
transmitters:  
4
1. Ensure the vehicle is  
electronically unlocked.  
2. Put the key in the ignition.  
3. Turn the key from the 2 (LOCK)  
position to 3 (OFF).  
3
1
5
2
4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within  
10 seconds) between the 3 (OFF)  
position and 4 (ON). Note: The  
eighth turn must end in the 4 (ON) position.  
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming  
mode has been activated.  
6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.  
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the  
procedure over again.  
7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry  
transmitter has been programmed.  
8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.  
9. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position after you have finished  
programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After 20  
seconds, you will automatically exit the programming mode.  
10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming  
mode has been exited.  
Illuminated entry  
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to  
unlock the door(s).  
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:  
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or  
the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or  
after 25 seconds of illumination.  
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the OFF  
position for the illuminated entry system to operate.  
The inside lights will not turn off if:  
they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or  
any door is open.  
70  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the  
ignition has been turned to the OFF position, 10 minutes after if the dome  
lamp is off, and 30 minutes after if the dome lamp switch is left on.  
Autolock (if equipped)  
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the following  
conditions are met:  
the ignition is in the ON position,  
all doors are closed,  
the brake is pressed before reaching 8 km/h (5 mph) and  
the vehicle is traveling more than 8 km/h (5 mph).  
Relock  
The autolock feature repeats when the following conditions are met:  
the vehicles speed is less than 8 km/h (5 mph), and  
any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the RUN  
position, and  
the brake is pressed before reaching 8 km/h (5 mph), and  
the vehicle is traveling more than 8 km/h (5 mph).  
Deactivating/activating the autolock feature  
Before following the procedure, make sure that the ignition is OFF and  
all vehicle doors are closed.  
You must complete steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will  
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must  
wait 30 seconds.  
1. Turn the ignition key to ON.  
2. Press the power door unlock control three times.  
3. Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF.  
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.  
5. Turn the ignition back to ON. The horn will chirp.  
6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will  
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long  
chirp) if autolock was activated. Note: Pressing the power door  
lock/unlock control again will toggle between activating and deactivating  
the autolock feature.  
7. Turn the ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the  
procedure is complete.  
71  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
SEATING  
Notes:  
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the  
seats safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the  
event of a collision.  
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of  
injury in a collision or sudden stop.  
Full bench seat (if equipped)  
Lift the release bar to move the  
seat forward or backward. Ensure  
that the seat is relatched into  
place.  
Pull up on the lever located at  
the bottom of the seatback to  
quickly fold the seatback forward.  
72  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
40/20/40 split bench seat (if equipped)  
Lift the track release bar to move  
the seat forward or backward.  
Ensure the seat is relatched into  
place.  
Pull the handle on the side of the  
seat up to recline the seat.  
Push down the lever located at  
the bottom of the seatback to  
quickly fold the seatback forward.  
40/20/40 front seat armrest and console (if equipped)  
To release the armrest, pull forward  
on the strap and pull the armrest  
down. Lift up armrest to return it to  
a center seatback.  
73  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
To gain access to the storage compartment in your armrest, lift the latch  
to open the lid. The lid cannot be opened in the upright position.  
Captain’s chair (if equipped)  
Lift the bar to move the seat  
forward or rearward. Make sure  
that the seat is relatched into  
place.  
To recline the seatback, pull the  
release lever handle located on  
the side of the seat up.  
Push down the lever (if  
equipped) located at the bottom  
of the seatback to quickly fold the  
seatback forward.  
74  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)  
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.  
Your vehicle will only be equipped with one of the two controls shown.  
Press to raise or lower the front  
portion of the seat cushion.  
Type A  
Type B  
Press to raise or lower the rear  
portion of the seat cushion.  
Type A  
Type B  
75  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Type A  
Press the control to move the seat  
forward, backward, up or down.  
Type B  
Press the control to move the seat  
forward or backward.  
Using the manual lumbar support  
For more lumbar support, turn the  
lumbar support control toward the  
front of vehicle.  
For less lumbar support, turn the  
lumbar support control toward the  
rear of vehicle.  
Heated seats (if equipped)  
To operate the heated seats, do the following:  
Push control to activate.  
Push again to deactivate.  
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated.  
The system automatically shuts off after 10 minutes.  
76  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
FOLDING UP THE REAR SEATS (IF EQUIPPED SUPERCAB  
ONLY)  
The rear seatback has a split 60/40 seat. Each seat cushion can be  
flipped up into the seatback position.  
1. Pull lever to release seat cushion.  
2. Rotate seat cushion up until it  
locks into vertical storage position.  
RETURNING THE SEAT TO SEATING POSITION  
Always be sure that the seat is in a latched position, whether the  
seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause  
injury during a sudden stop.  
1. Pull lever on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from storage  
position.  
2. Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position.  
SAFETY RESTRAINTS  
Safety restraints precautions  
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap  
belt snug and low across the hips.  
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they  
can be properly restrained.  
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the  
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from  
injury in a collision.  
77  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always  
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is  
provided.  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or  
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas  
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to  
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and  
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a  
safety belt properly.  
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely  
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.  
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt  
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that  
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the  
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)  
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.  
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.  
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back  
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.  
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been  
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check  
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.  
78  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Combination lap and shoulder belts  
1. Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle (the buckle closest to  
the direction the tongue is coming  
from) until you hear a snap and feel  
it latch. Make sure the tongue is  
securely fastened in the buckle.  
2. To unfasten, push the release  
button and remove the tongue from  
the buckle.  
The front outboard and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are  
combination lap and shoulder belts. The front outboard passenger and  
rear seat outboard safety belts have two types of locking modes  
described below:  
Vehicle sensitive mode  
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length  
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle  
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner  
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph)  
or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward  
movement of the driver and passengers.  
On SuperCab and CrewCab models, the front seat belt system can also  
be made to lock manually by quickly pulling on the shoulder belt.  
Rear seat belts (if equipped) cannot be made to lock up by pulling  
quickly on the belt.  
Automatic locking mode  
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.  
79  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
When to use the automatic locking mode  
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will  
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic  
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.  
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed in a  
passenger front or outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children  
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat  
whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety  
seats for children later in this chapter.  
How to use the automatic locking mode  
Buckle the combination lap and  
shoulder belt.  
Grasp the shoulder portion and  
pull downward until the entire  
belt is pulled out.  
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking  
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking  
mode.  
80  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
How to disengage the automatic locking mode  
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract  
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the  
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.  
After any vehicle collision, the front passenger and rear outboard  
seat belt systems must be checked by a qualified technician to  
verify that the automatic locking retractorfeature for child seats is  
still functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked  
for proper function.  
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if  
the seat belt assembly automatic locking retractorfeature or  
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked  
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace  
the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in  
collisions.  
Energy Management Feature  
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management  
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce  
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.  
The front outboard seat belt systems have a retractor assembly that is  
designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is  
designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupants chest.  
Safety belt replacement label  
The short plastic boot on the front  
safety belt at the passenger  
outboard anchor location covers a  
Replace Beltlabel on the safety  
belt.  
81  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
In the event of a collision, the  
colored label (REPLACE BELT)  
may become visible. If this occurs,  
the safety belt must be replaced.  
Whenever the yellow  
portion of the label is  
visible, the safety belt must be  
replaced.  
Failure to follow these  
instructions will affect the  
performance of the safety belts  
and increase the risk of personal  
injury.  
Safety belt pretensioner  
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and  
front outboard passenger seating positions.  
The Seat Integrated Restraints (SIR) seat (which has shoulder belts  
attached to the corners of the front seat back) is equipped with a buckle  
pretensioner. Do NOT place objects between the seats, this could  
interfere with the functioning of the pretensioner. For the SuperCab and  
CrewCab base bench seats and all Regular Cab seating positions, the  
safety belts are equipped with a retractor pretensioner.  
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners are  
designed to activate only during certain frontal or near-frontal collisions  
with sufficient longitudinal deceleration. A safety belt pretensioner is a  
device which tightens the webbing of the lap and shoulder belts during  
some collisions in such a way that they fit more snugly against the body.  
82  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including  
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle  
is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt  
pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this  
chapter.  
Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above  
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of  
a collision.  
Front safety belt height adjustment  
If your shoulder belts come out of the seatback, you will not have a  
safety belt height adjuster.  
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle  
of your shoulder.  
Regular Cab and 4door CrewCab  
4door Super Cab (if equipped)  
To adjust the shoulder belt height, push the button and slide the height  
adjuster up or down. Release the button and pull down on the height  
adjuster to make sure it is locked in place.  
83  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests  
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety  
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and  
increase the risk of injury in a collision.  
Lap belts  
Adjusting the lap belt  
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the  
hips, not across the waist.  
1st row and 3rd row (if equipped) center seating positions  
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.  
Insert the tongue into the correct  
buckle (the buckle closest to the  
direction the tongue is coming  
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the  
tongue at a right angle to the belt  
and pull across your lap until it  
reaches the buckle. To tighten the  
belt, pull the loose end of the belt  
through the tongue until it fits  
snugly across the hips.  
Shorten and fasten the belt when  
not in use.  
84  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
2nd row center seating position (if equipped)  
The lap belt will not adjust automatically. To fasten, grasp the tongue,  
and with a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing to buckle the  
tongue into the correct buckle. If you did not pull out enough webbing to  
reach the buckle, allow the tongue to retract fully before trying to pull it  
out again.  
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime  
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a  
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.  
Conditions of operation  
If...  
Then...  
The drivers safety belt is not  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position...  
The safety belt warning light  
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the  
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.  
The drivers safety belt is  
buckled while the indicator  
light is illuminated and the  
warning chime is sounding...  
The drivers safety belt is  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position...  
The safety belt warning light and  
warning chime turn off.  
The safety belt warning light and  
indicator chime remain off.  
BeltMinder  
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt  
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the  
driver that the drivers safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently  
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the  
instrument cluster.  
85  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
If...  
Then...  
The drivers safety belt is not  
buckled before the vehicle has  
reached at least 5 km/h (3 mph)  
and 1-2 minutes have elapsed  
The BeltMinder feature is  
activated - the safety belt warning  
light illuminates and the warning  
chime sounds for 6 seconds every  
since the ignition switch has been 30 seconds, repeating for  
turned to ON...  
approximately 5 minutes or until  
safety belt is buckled.  
The drivers safety belt is buckled The BeltMinder feature will not  
while the safety belt indicator light activate.  
is illuminated and the safety belt  
warning chime is sounding...  
The drivers safety belt is buckled The BeltMinder feature will not  
before the ignition switch is turned activate.  
to the ON position...  
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:  
(All statistics based on U.S. data)  
Reasons given...  
Consider...  
Crashes are rare events”  
36700 crashes occur every day. The  
more we drive, the more we are  
exposed to rareevents, even for  
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be  
seriously injured in a crash during  
our lifetime.  
Im not going far”  
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25  
miles of home.  
Belts are uncomfortable”  
We design our safety belts to enhance  
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -  
try different positions for the safety  
belt upper anchorage and seatback  
which should be as upright as  
possible; this can improve comfort.  
Prime time for an accident.  
BeltMinder reminds us to take a few  
seconds to buckle up.  
I was in a hurry”  
86  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Reasons given...  
Consider...  
Safety belts dont work”  
Safety belts, when used properly,  
reduce risk of death to front seat  
occupants by 45% in cars, and by  
60% in light trucks.  
Traffic is light”  
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in  
single-vehicle crashes, many when  
no other vehicles are around.  
Possibly, but a serious crash can do  
much more than wrinkle your clothes,  
particularly if you are unbelted.  
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4  
times more often in vehicles with  
TWO or MORE people. Children and  
younger brothers/sisters imitate  
behavior they see.  
Belts wrinkle my clothes”  
The people Im with dont  
wear belts”  
I have an air bag”  
Air bags offer greater protection when  
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags  
are not designed to inflate in rear and  
side crashes or rollovers.  
Id rather be thrown clear”  
Not a good idea. People who are  
ejected are 40 times more likely  
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent  
ejection, WE CANT PICK OUR  
CRASH.  
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt  
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of  
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt  
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below.  
One time disable  
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an  
ignition ON cycle, the BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle  
only.  
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature  
Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the  
deactivation/activation programming procedure.  
87  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the  
following procedure:  
Before following the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are  
met:  
The parking brake is set.  
The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral  
position (manual transmission).  
The ignition switch is in the OFF position.  
All vehicle doors are closed.  
The drivers safety belt is unbuckled.  
The parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped  
with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure).  
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt  
Minder feature while driving the vehicle.  
BeltMinder activation and deactivation procedure  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT  
START THE ENGINE.)  
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 12  
minutes.)  
Steps 35 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will  
have to be repeated.  
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the  
safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMinder  
warning activation.  
4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps.  
5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the  
safety belt unbuckled.  
After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three  
seconds.  
6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off,  
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.  
This will disable BeltMinder if it is currently enabled, or enable  
BeltMinder if it is currently disabled.  
7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder is provided by the safety belt  
warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds.  
88  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder is provided by:  
The safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three  
seconds.  
Followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off.  
Once again, the safety belt warning light will flash four times per  
second for three seconds.  
9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is  
complete.  
Safety belt extension assembly  
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 20 cm (8  
inch) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number  
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.  
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety  
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on  
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too  
short for you when fully extended.  
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt  
across the torso.  
Safety belt maintenance  
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work  
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure  
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt  
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle  
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder  
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if  
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching  
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company  
recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a  
collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified  
technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to  
operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies  
not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if  
either damage or improper operation is noted.  
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt  
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe  
personal injuries in the event of a collision.  
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.  
89  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)  
Important SRS precautions  
The SRS is designed to work with  
the safety belt to help protect the  
driver and right front passenger  
from certain upper body injuries. Air  
bags DO NOT inflate slowly; there is  
a risk of injury from a deploying air  
bag.  
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always  
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is  
provided.  
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back  
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.  
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)  
recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches)  
between an occupants chest and the driver air bag module.  
90  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air  
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.  
To properly position yourself away from the air bag:  
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the  
pedals comfortably.  
Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.  
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing  
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those  
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing  
serious injury.  
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag  
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or  
Lincoln Mercury dealer.  
The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to  
an occupant in the center front seating position.  
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle  
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow  
hooks) may affect the performance of the air bag system, increasing  
the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.  
Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect  
the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of  
injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions  
about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.  
Removing the blocker beam without installing snow plow  
attachment hardware may effect air bag deployment in a crash.  
Do not operate the truck unless either the blocker beam or snow plow  
attachment hardware is installed on the vehicle.  
91  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Children and air bags  
For additional important safety information, read all information on  
safety restraints in this guide.  
Children must always be properly restrained. Failure to follow these  
instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision.  
An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal  
injuries from a deploying passenger air bag. Rear facing infant  
seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless the passenger  
air bag is turned off. See Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch.  
How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work?  
The air bag SRS is designed to  
activate when the vehicle sustains  
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.  
The fact that the air bags did not  
inflate in a collision does not mean  
that something is wrong with the  
system. Rather, it means the forces  
were not of the type sufficient to  
cause activation. Air bags are  
designed to inflate in frontal and  
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,  
side-impact, or rear-impacts.  
The air bags inflate and deflate  
rapidly upon activation. After air bag  
deployment, it is normal to notice a  
smoke-like, powdery residue or  
smell the burnt propellant. This may  
consist of cornstarch, talcum  
powder (to lubricate the bag) or  
sodium compounds (e.g., baking  
soda) that result from the  
combustion process that inflates the  
air bag. Small amounts of sodium  
hydroxide may be present which  
may irritate the skin and eyes, but  
none of the residue is toxic.  
92  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, it may also  
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because air  
bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of  
death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or  
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly  
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of air bag  
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly  
restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while  
maintaining vehicle control.  
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not  
touch them after inflation.  
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function  
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not  
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a  
collision.  
The SRS consists of:  
driver and passenger (if equipped) air bag modules (which include the  
inflators and air bags),  
one or more impact and safing sensors,  
a readiness light and tone  
and the electrical wiring which connects the components.  
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the  
supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the impact  
sensors), the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air  
bag back up power and the air bag ignitors.  
93  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Determining if the system is operational  
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to  
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section  
in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is  
not required.  
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:  
The readiness light will either  
flash or stay lit.  
The readiness light will not  
illuminate immediately after  
ignition is turned on.  
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced  
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless  
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a  
collision.  
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including  
pretensioners)  
See your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE  
disposed of by qualified personnel.  
Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch  
An air bag ON/OFF switch  
has been installed in this  
PASSENGER AIR BAG  
vehicle. Before driving, always  
look at the face of the switch to  
be sure the switch is in the proper  
position in accordance with these  
instructions and warnings. Failure  
to put the switch in a proper  
position can increase the risk of  
serious injury or death in a  
collision.  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
94  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Turning the passenger air bag off  
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the  
switch to OFF position and hold in  
OFF position while removing the  
key.  
PASSENGER AIR BAG  
OFF  
ON  
2. When the ignition is turned to the  
ON position the OFF light  
OFF  
illuminates briefly, momentarily  
shuts off and then turns back on.  
This indicates that the passenger air  
bag is deactivated.  
If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air bag switch  
is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the  
passenger air bag switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury  
dealer immediately.  
In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch, always  
remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON/OFF  
switch.  
Turning the passenger air bag back on  
The passenger air bag remains OFF until you turn it back ON.  
1. Insert the ignition key and turn  
the switch to ON.  
PASSENGER AIR BAG  
2. The OFF light will briefly  
OFF  
ON  
illuminate when the ignition is  
turned to On. This indicates that the  
passenger air bag is operational.  
OFF  
If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger air bag switch  
is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the  
passenger air bag switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury  
dealer immediately.  
95  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The passenger side air bag should always be ON (the air bag OFF light  
should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets  
the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the  
NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows.  
The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating  
positions have been specifically designed to function together  
with the air bags in certain types of crashes. When you turn OFF your  
air bag, you not only lose the protection of the air bag, you also may  
reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system, which was  
designed to work with the air bag. If you are not a person who meets  
the requirements stated in the NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation  
criteria turning OFF the air bag can increase the risk of serious injury  
or death in a collision.  
If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport children who are  
12 and younger in the rear seat. Always use safety belts and  
child restraints properly. If a child in a rear facing infant seat must be  
transported in front, the passenger air bag must be turned OFF. This is  
because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating air bag  
and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the air bag inflates is  
substantial.  
The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an air  
bag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening  
injuries, air bags must open with great force, and this force can pose a  
potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a front seat  
occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way to reduce  
the risk of unnecessary air bag injuries without reducing the overall  
safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly  
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the  
protection of safety belts and permits the air bags to provide the  
additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to  
deactivate your air bag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing  
benefits of the air bag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the  
safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to  
work as a safety system with the air bags.  
Read all air bag Warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other  
important air bag instructions and Warnings in this Owners Guide.  
96  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
NHTSA deactivation criteria (excluding Canada)  
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat  
because:  
the vehicle has no rear seat;  
the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing  
infant seat; or  
the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infants  
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that  
the driver can constantly monitor the childs condition.  
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat  
because:  
the vehicle has no rear seat;  
although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever  
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front  
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or  
the child has a medical condition which, according to the childs  
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so  
that the driver can constantly monitor the childs condition.  
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which,  
according to his or her physician:  
causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk for the passenger;  
and  
makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag in a crash  
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the air bag and  
allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or  
windshield in a crash.  
This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the  
driver and right front passenger. These particular belts are  
specifically designed to work with air bags to help reduce the risk of  
injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to  
give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce  
concentration of force on an occupants chest and reduce the risk of  
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if  
the air bag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might  
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a  
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the  
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the air bag is turned ON for  
any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation  
criteria.  
97  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Transport Canada deactivation criteria (Canada Only)  
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat  
because:  
my vehicle has no rear seat;  
the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant  
seat; or  
the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infants  
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so  
that the driver can monitor the infants condition.  
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the  
front seat because:  
my vehicle has no rear seat;  
although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever  
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes  
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or  
the child has a medical condition that, according to the childs  
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so  
that the driver can monitor the childs condition.  
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that,  
according to his or her physician:  
poses a special risk for the passenger if the air bag deploys; and  
makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag deployment  
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the air bag and  
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the air bag  
This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the  
driver and right front passenger. These particular belts are  
specifically designed to work with air bags to help reduce the risk of  
injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to  
give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce  
concentration of force on an occupants chest and reduce the risk of  
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if  
the air bag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might  
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a  
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the  
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the air bag is turned ON for  
any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation  
criteria.  
98  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN  
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety  
restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags.  
Important child restraint precautions  
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.  
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old  
or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less) ride in your vehicle,  
you must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check  
your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements  
regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When possible, always  
place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident  
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the  
rear seating positions than in the front seating position.  
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the  
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from  
injury in a collision.  
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or  
child restraint you might use.  
Children and safety belts  
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children  
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety  
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.  
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that  
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.  
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can  
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the childs face or  
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child  
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt  
fit.  
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in  
your vehicle.  
99  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Child booster seats  
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh  
40 pounds and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt  
will provide some protection, these children are still too small for  
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious  
injury.  
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who  
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use  
of a belt-positioning booster.  
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the  
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees  
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better  
and more comfortably for growing children.  
When children should use booster seats  
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the  
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and  
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about  
80 lbs (about 8 to 12 years old).  
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these  
questions:  
Can the child sit all the way back  
against the vehicle seat back with  
knees bent comfortably at the  
edge of the seat without  
slouching?  
Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?  
Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?  
Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?  
100  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Types of booster seats  
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:  
Those that are backless.  
If your backless booster seat has a  
removable shield, remove the  
shield and use the lap/shoulder  
belt. If a seating position has a  
low seat back and no head  
restraint, a backless booster seat  
may place your childs head (top  
of ear level) above the top of the  
seat. In this case, move the  
backless booster to another  
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.  
Those with a high back.  
If, with a backless booster seat,  
you cannot find a seating position  
that adequately supports your  
childs head, a high back booster  
seat would be a better choice.  
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with  
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lbs.  
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of  
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,  
never up high across the stomach.  
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh  
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this  
condition.  
The importance of shoulder belts  
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a childs  
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should  
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster  
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children  
to ride.  
101  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the  
booster seat.  
Never put the shoulder belt under a childs arm or behind the  
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of  
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.  
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can  
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a  
collision.  
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN  
Child and infant or child safety seats  
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the  
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturers instructions with the  
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the  
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or  
collision.  
102  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
When installing a child safety seat:  
Review and follow the information  
presented in the Air bag  
supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) section in this chapter.  
Use the correct safety belt buckle  
for that seating position (the  
buckle closest to the direction the  
tongue is coming from).  
Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle until you hear a  
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the  
buckle.  
Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety  
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,  
to prevent accidental unbuckling.  
Place seat back in upright position.  
Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic  
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating  
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter.  
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether  
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with a tether  
anchor. For more information on top tether straps, refer to Attaching  
child safety seats with tether straps. in this chapter.  
Carefully follow all of the manufacturers instructions included  
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install  
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden  
stop or collision.  
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed  
in the front seats, unless the passenger airbag On/Off switch is  
turned off. See Passenger airbag on/off switch in this chapter.  
103  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder  
belts  
1. Position the child safety seat in a  
seat with a combination lap and  
shoulder belt.  
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER put a  
rear-facing child seat in the front unless the passenger air bag  
switch is turned off. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the  
front seat, move the seat all the way back and turn the passenger air  
bag off. See Passenger air bag on/off switch.  
An air bag can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Child seats  
should never be placed in the front seats, unless the passenger  
air bag switch is turned off, See Passenger air bag on/off switch.  
Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in the front  
seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off.  
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt  
and then grasp the shoulder belt  
and lap belt together.  
104  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
3. While holding the shoulder and  
lap belt portions together, route the  
tongue through the child seat  
according to the child seat  
manufacturers instructions. Be sure  
the belt webbing is not twisted.  
4. Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle (the buckle closest to  
the direction the tongue is coming  
from) for that seating position until  
you hear and feel the latch engage.  
Make sure the tongue is latched  
securely by pulling on it.  
5. To put the retractor in the  
automatic locking mode, grasp the  
shoulder portion of the belt and pull  
downward until all of the belt is  
extracted and a click is heard.  
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it  
is in the automatic locking mode.  
105  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
7. Pull the lap belt portion across  
the child seat toward the buckle and  
pull up on the shoulder belt while  
pushing down with knee on the  
child seat.  
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to  
remove any slack in the belt.  
9. Before placing the child in the  
seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward  
and back to make sure the seat is  
securely held in place. To check  
this, grab the seat at the belt path  
and attempt to move it side to side  
and forward. There should be no  
more than one inch of movement for  
proper installation.  
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is  
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt  
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps  
two through nine.  
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.  
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps  
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which  
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether  
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact  
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a  
tether strap.  
The passenger seats of your vehicle may be equipped with built-in tether  
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.  
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be straps on the seatback or an  
anchor bracket on the rear edge of the seat cushion or an anchor bracket  
mounted to the body shell on the back panel.  
106  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The SuperCab rear seat has three straps behind the top of the seat back  
that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor loops.  
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions  
(shown from top view):  
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as  
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached  
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.  
FSeries Regular Cab  
FSeries SuperCab  
FSeries Crew Cab  
Tether strap attachment  
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.  
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.  
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.  
4. You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether  
anchors. Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before  
installing the child seat. Refer to the Folding down the rear seats  
section in this chapter for information on how to operate the rear seats.  
107  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
5. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.  
Front seat (SuperCab only)  
Front seats (Regular Cab) and  
Rear seats (Crew Cab only)  
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat  
may not be retained properly in the event of a collision.  
6. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and  
shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further  
instructions to secure the child safety seat.  
7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the  
manufacturers instructions.  
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child  
being injured in a collision greatly increases.  
Tether strap attachment rear SuperCab only  
There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat  
(along the bottom edge of the rear window) in the SuperCab. These  
loops are to be used as both routing loops and anchor loops for child  
safety seat tether straps.  
108  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to  
the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap:  
1. Route the tether strap through  
the loop directly behind the child  
seat.  
2. Attach the strap hook onto the  
loop behind an adjacent seating  
position.  
3. Install the child safety seat tightly  
using the vehicle belts. Follow the  
instructions in this chapter.  
4. Tighten the tether strap  
according to the child seat  
manufacturers instructions.  
A single loop can be used to route and anchor more than one child seat.  
For example, the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child  
safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child  
seats installed in the outboard rear seats.  
109  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Driving  
STARTING  
Positions of the ignition  
1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical  
accessories such as the radio to  
operate while the engine is not  
running.  
4
3
1
5
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel,  
automatic transmission gearshift  
lever and allows key removal. For  
vehicle equipped with a manual  
transmission, you must depress the  
ignition release lever to release the  
key.  
2
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all accessories without locking the  
steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission shift  
lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal  
being depressed.  
When the key is in the ignition OFF position, the automatic  
transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position  
without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle  
movement, always set the parking brake.  
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key  
position when driving.  
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine  
starts.  
Preparing to start your vehicle  
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This  
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard  
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio  
noise.  
When starting a fuel-injected engine, dont press the accelerator before  
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty  
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to  
Starting the engine in this chapter.  
110  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high  
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk  
of fire or other damage.  
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry  
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine  
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.  
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed  
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door  
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in  
this chapter for more instructions.  
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer  
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell  
exhaust fumes.  
Important safety precautions  
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If  
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle  
checked. The following starting instructions are for vehicles equipped  
with a gasoline engine; if your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine,  
refer to Starting the engine in the your Diesel owner guide supplement.  
Before starting the vehicle:  
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more  
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating  
and Safety Restraints chapter.  
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.  
111  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:  
1. Make sure the parking brake is  
set.  
2. Make sure the gearshift is in P  
(Park).  
If starting a vehicle with a manual  
transmission:  
1. Make sure the parking brake is  
set.  
2. Push the clutch pedal to the floor.  
112  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Turn the key to 4 (ON) without  
turning the key to 5 (START).  
4
3
1
5
2
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a  
light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.  
If the drivers safety belt is fastened, the  
Starting the engine  
light may not illuminate.  
1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without  
turning the key to 5 (START).  
4
2. Turn the key to 5 (START), then  
release the key as soon as the  
engine starts. Excessive cranking  
could damage the starter.  
3
5
2
1
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,  
turn the key to 3 (OFF), wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still  
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will  
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is  
flooded with fuel.  
113  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)  
Use of an engine block heater is  
strongly recommended if you live in  
a region where temperatures reach  
-23° C (-10° F) or below. For best  
results, plug the heater in at least  
three hours before starting the  
vehicle. The heater can be plugged  
in the night before starting the  
vehicle. The plug for the block  
heater is exposed in the front of the  
vehicle, beneath the grille. Vehicles  
equipped with a gasoline engine have the plug exposed on the driver  
side of the vehicle; vehicles equipped with a Diesel engine have the plug  
exposed on the passenger side of the vehicle.  
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater  
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)  
adapters.  
Guarding against exhaust fumes  
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid  
its dangerous effects.  
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer  
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell  
exhaust fumes.  
Important ventilating information  
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of  
time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch) or adjust the heating  
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.  
114  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
BRAKES  
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding  
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out  
and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. If the vehicle  
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,  
the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician.  
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS) (if equipped)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).  
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops  
by keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor  
and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking; any  
pulsation or mechanical noise you may feel or hear is normal.  
ABS  
ABS warning lamp  
ABS  
The  
lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when  
the ignition is turned to ON. If the light does not illuminate during start  
up, remains on or flashes, the ABS may be disabled and may need to be  
serviced.  
Even when the ABS is disabled,  
normal braking is still effective. (If  
your BRAKE warning lamp  
illuminates with the parking brake  
released, have your brake system serviced immediately.)  
Using ABS  
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake  
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the  
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicles stopping  
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain  
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.  
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.  
115  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Parking brake  
To set the parking brake, press the  
parking brake pedal down until the  
pedal stops.  
The BRAKE warning lamp in the  
instrument cluster illuminates and  
remains illuminated until the  
parking brake is released.  
Pull the right side of the release  
lever to release the parking brake;  
the release lever pulls at an angle  
toward the drivers door. To prevent  
the pedal from releasing too quickly,  
place your left foot on the parking  
brake pedal, then pull the release  
lever, making sure the pedal fully  
releases. You may want to pull the  
release lever again to make sure the  
parking brake is full released.  
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the  
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic  
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).  
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the engine  
may be required to run while power accessories operate and the parking  
brake is set. It is recommended that wheel chocks be used during this  
operation.  
116  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
If youre parking your vehicle on a grade or with a trailer, press and hold  
the brake pedal down, then set the parking brake. There may be a little  
vehicle movement as the parking brake sets to hold the vehicles weight.  
This is normal and should be no reason for concern. If needed, press and  
hold the service brake pedal down, then try reapplying the parking  
brake. Chock the wheels if required. If the parking brake cannot hold the  
weight of the vehicle, the parking brake may need to be serviced or the  
vehicle may be overloaded.  
STEERING  
To prevent damage to the power steering system:  
Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it  
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.  
Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level  
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).  
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned  
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.  
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:  
an improperly inflated tire  
uneven tire wear  
loose or worn suspension components  
loose or worn steering components  
improper steering alignment  
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering  
seem to wander/pull.  
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)  
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when  
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the  
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle.  
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE  
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than  
other types of vehicles.  
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely  
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.  
117  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the  
vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.  
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and  
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a  
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not  
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more  
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under  
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt  
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in  
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal  
injury and death.  
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle  
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as  
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when  
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.  
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)  
Brake-shift interlock  
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents  
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is  
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed.  
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in  
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:  
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the  
key.  
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift  
to N (Neutral).  
When the key is in the ignition OFF position, the automatic  
transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position  
without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle  
movement, always set the parking brake.  
3. Start the vehicle.  
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,  
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicles brakelamps are not  
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside  
emergencies chapter.  
118  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps  
are working.  
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is  
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and  
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.  
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp  
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.  
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.  
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4speed automatic  
transmission (if equipped-gasoline engines only)  
P (Park)  
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from  
turning.  
To put your vehicle in gear:  
Start the engine  
Depress the brake pedal  
Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear  
To put your vehicle in P (Park):  
Come to a complete stop  
Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)  
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is  
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and  
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.  
R (Reverse)  
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.  
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R  
(Reverse).  
119  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
N (Neutral)  
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is  
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.  
(Overdrive)  
The normal driving position for the  
best fuel economy. Transmission  
operates in gears one through four.  
(Overdrive) can be deactivated  
by pressing the transmission control  
switch on the end of the gearshift  
lever.  
OVERDRIVE OFF  
This transmission control indicator  
light (TCIL) will illuminate on the  
end of the gearshift.  
OVERDRIVE  
Note: If the Overdrive OFF light  
flashes steadily at any time, have  
the system serviced immediately.  
Drive (not shown)  
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.  
This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.  
O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.  
Provides engine braking.  
Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to  
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer  
towing and when engine braking is required.  
To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control  
switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.  
O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned  
off regardless of last mode of operation.  
120  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
2 (Second)  
This position allows for second gear only.  
Provides engine braking.  
Use to start-up on slippery roads.  
To return to  
(Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the  
(Overdrive) position.  
Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to  
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.  
1 (First)  
Provides maximum engine braking.  
Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.  
Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)  
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.  
Forced downshifts  
Allowed in  
(Overdrive) or Drive.  
Depress the accelerator to the floor.  
Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.  
Shift strategy (4R100 automatic transmission)  
To account for customer driving habits and conditions, your 4R100  
automatic transmission electronically controls the shift quality by using  
an adaptive learning strategy. The adaptive learning strategy is  
maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected  
or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive  
strategy. Optimal shifting will resume within a few hundred kilometers  
(miles) of operation.  
If the shift quality does not improve within a few hundred  
kilometers (miles) of operation, or if the downshifts and other  
throttle conditions do not function normally, see your dealer or a  
qualified service technician as soon as possible.  
121  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Understanding the shift positions of the 5speed automatic  
transmission (if equipped-Diesel engines only)  
Your transmission is equipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in  
the vehicle computer. This feature is designed to increase durability, and  
provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or  
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is  
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the  
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update  
transmission operation. Additionally, whenever the battery is  
disconnected or a new battery installed, the strategy must be relearned.  
P (Park)  
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from  
turning.  
To put your vehicle in gear:  
Start the engine  
Depress the brake pedal  
Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear  
To put your vehicle in P (Park):  
Come to a complete stop  
Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)  
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is  
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and  
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.  
R (Reverse)  
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.  
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R  
(Reverse).  
N (Neutral)  
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is  
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.  
122  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF  
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF is the normal driving position for the  
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and  
downshifts through gears one through five.  
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul ON  
The Tow/Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a  
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when  
using Tow/Haul.  
To activate Tow/Haul, press the  
button on the end of the gearshift  
lever.  
The ON light on the end of the  
gearshift lever will illuminate when  
it is activated.  
The TOW HAUL indicator light will illuminate on the end of the gearshift  
lever.  
Tow/Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.  
Tow/Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the  
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will  
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when  
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load  
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control  
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal  
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based  
upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.  
To deactivate the Tow/Haul feature and return to normal driving mode,  
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The ON light will no  
longer be illuminated.  
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will  
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).  
3 (Third)  
Transmission operates up to third gear only.  
123  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)  
provides engine braking.  
2 (Second)  
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional  
engine braking on downgrades.  
1 (First)  
Provides maximum engine braking.  
Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.  
The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it  
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the  
vehicle reaches slower speeds.  
Forced downshifts  
Allowed in  
(Overdrive) or Drive.  
Depress the accelerator to the floor.  
Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by  
shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a  
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.  
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating  
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.  
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the  
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.  
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)  
D
R 1 3  
L 2 4  
Using the clutch  
The manual transmission has a starter interlock that prevents cranking  
the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.  
124  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
To start the vehicle:  
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.  
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the  
neutral position.  
3. Start the engine, then press the brake pedal and release the parking  
brake.  
4. Move the gearshift lever to the desired gear, then slowly release the  
clutch pedal while slowly pressing on the accelerator.  
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor.  
Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause increased  
shift efforts and prematurely wear components in the transmission. Make  
sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesnt interfere with the  
full extension of the clutch pedal.  
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch  
pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These  
actions will reduce the life of the clutch.  
Recommended shift speeds  
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel  
economy)  
6-speed transmission  
Shift from:  
Transfer case position1 (if equipped)  
2H or 4H  
4L  
LO-1  
1-2  
2-3  
3-4  
4
8 km/h (5 mph)  
16 km/h (10 mph)  
32 km/h (20 mph)  
48 km/h (30 mph)  
64 km/h (40 mph)  
3 km/h (2 mph)  
6 km/h (4 mph)  
13 km/h (8 mph)  
19 km/h (12 mph)  
24 km/h (15 mph)  
D
-
(Overdrive)  
125  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Maximum downshift speeds1  
6-speed transmission  
Shift from:  
Transfer case position (if equipped)2  
2H or 4H  
4L  
D
72 km/h (45 mph)  
26 km/h (16 mph)  
(Overdrive) -  
4
4-3  
3-2  
2-1  
56 km/h (35 mph)  
32 km/h (20 mph)  
8 km/h (5 mph)  
19 km/h (12 mph)  
13 km/h (8 mph)  
3 km/h (2 mph)  
1-LO  
Only shift to LO when at a stop.  
1
2
Use 2H or 4H for 4WD equipped vehicles.  
Downshift at lower speeds when driving on slippery surfaces.  
Reverse  
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into  
R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.  
2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least  
three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).  
The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving it  
from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).  
This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from  
accidentally being shifted into R (Reverse) from  
(Overdrive).  
Parking your vehicle  
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.  
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).  
3. Turn the ignition off.  
Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly  
and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake  
fully.  
126  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Removing the key  
Turn the ignition off, push the  
release lever (located above the  
ignition), then turn the key toward  
you and remove the key.  
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of  
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the  
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 5 km/h (3 mph). The system is not  
effective at speeds above 5 km/h (3 mph) and may not detect certain  
angular or moving objects.  
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the  
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this  
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and  
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking  
speeds. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;  
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.  
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in  
reverse and when using the RSS.  
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or  
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to  
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging  
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly  
those close to the ground.  
127  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
The RSS detects obstacles up to 2  
meters (6 ft.) from the rear bumper  
with a decreased coverage area at  
the outer corners of the bumper,  
(refer to the figures for approximate  
zone coverage areas). As you move  
closer to the obstacle, the rate of  
the tone increases. When the  
obstacle is less than 25.0 cm (10  
in.) away, the tone will sound  
continuously. If the RSS detects a  
stationary or receding object further  
than 25.0 cm (10 in.) from the side  
of the vehicle, the tone will sound  
for only three seconds. Once the  
system detects an object  
approaching, the tone will sound  
again.  
The RSS may have reduced  
performance or an increased chance  
of false detection if the tailgate is  
not locked and in the upright position. If the tailgate is down, the RSS  
tone may be heard intermittently or continuously. The tone may also be  
heard if items in the truck bed protrude rearward outside the bed.  
The RSS automatically turns on  
when the gear selector is placed in  
R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON.  
An RSS control allows the driver to  
turn the RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off, the ignition must be ON,  
and the gear selector in R (Reverse). An indicator light on the control  
will illuminate when the system is turned off. If the indicator light  
illuminates when the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a failure in  
the RSS. The RSS will remain off until either the RSS control is pushed  
again or the ignition switch is recycled.  
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free  
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the  
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will  
affect the accuracy of the RSS.  
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving  
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing  
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.  
128  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)  
For important information regarding safe operation of this type  
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.  
When fourwheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four  
wheels through a transfer case. 4WD can be selected when additional  
driving power is desired.  
4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing so could  
result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, increased tire wear  
and decreased fuel economy.  
Manual 4x4 system (if equipped)  
The 4WD system is engaged or  
disengaged by rotating the control  
for both front wheel hub locks from  
the FREE or LOCK position, then  
manually engaging or disengaging  
the transfer case with the  
floor-mounted shifter. For increased  
fuel economy in 2WD, rotate both  
hub locks to the FREE position.  
For proper operation, make  
sure that the arrow and the  
indicator dot on the hub are  
aligned, and that both hub  
locks are set to the same  
position (both set to LOCK or both set to FREE).  
Electronic shift on the fly (ESOF) 4x4 system (if equipped)  
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low  
is selected while the vehicle is moving, the 4WD system will not  
engage. This is normal and should be no reason for concern.  
Before 4WD Low can be engaged, the vehicle must be brought to  
a complete stop, the brake pedal depressed and the transmission  
placed in N (Neutral ) (on automatic transmissions or the clutch  
pedal depressed on manual transmissions).  
The 4WD system:  
provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is  
moving.  
129  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that  
allows you select 2WD, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation.  
uses auto-manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged  
automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected.  
auto-manual hub locks can be  
manually overridden by rotating  
the hub lock control from AUTO  
to LOCK if desired.  
automatic operation of the  
hub locks is recommended, and  
will increase fuel economy  
For proper operation, make  
sure that the arrow and the  
indicator dot on the hub are  
aligned, and that both hub  
locks are set the same (both  
set to AUTO or both set to  
LOCK).  
4WD system indicator lights  
The 4WD system indicator lights illuminate only under the following  
conditions. If these lights illuminate when driving in 2WD, contact your  
Ford dealer as soon as possible.  
4x4 - momentarily illuminates  
4x4  
after the engine is started.  
Illuminates when 4H (4x4 High)  
or 4L (4x4 Low) is engaged.  
LOW RANGE momentarily  
LOW  
RANGE  
illuminates when the ignition is  
turned to the ON position.  
Illuminates when 4L (4x4 Low) is  
engaged.  
Using a manual 4WD system (if equipped)  
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.  
This is normal.  
2H (2WD High) For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear  
wheels only.  
4H (4WD High) For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to  
front and rear wheels.  
130  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
N (Neutral) Only used when towing the vehicle.  
4L (4WD Low)For low-speed off-road applications that require extra  
power such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water.  
Sends power to front and rear wheels.  
Shifting from 2H (2WD High) to 4H (4WD High)  
Engage the locking hubs by rotating  
the hub lock control from FREE to  
LOCK, then move the transfer case  
lever from 2H (2WD High) to 4H  
(4WD High).  
For proper operation, make  
sure that the arrow and the  
indicator dot on the hub are  
aligned, and that both hubs  
are set to LOCK.  
Do not shift into 4H (4WD  
2H  
4H  
High) with the rear wheels  
slipping.  
N
4L  
Shifting from 4H (4WD High) to 2H (2WD High)  
Move the transfer case lever to 2H  
(2WD High) at a stop or any forward  
speed up to 88 km/h (55 mph).  
2H  
4H  
With the vehicle at complete stop,  
disengage the locking hubs  
N
(optional) by rotating the hub lock  
control from LOCK to FREE.  
4L  
For proper operation, make  
sure that the arrow and the indicator dot on the hub are  
aligned, and that both hubs are set to FREE  
131  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Shifting from 4H (4WD High) to 4L (4WD Low)  
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.  
2. Depress the brake.  
3. Place the gearshift lever in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or  
depress the clutch (manual transmission).  
4. Move the transfer case shift lever  
through N (Neutral) directly to 4L  
(4WD Low).  
2H  
4H  
5. If the transfer case will not  
engage into 4L (4WD Low), drive  
the vehicle above 8 km/h (5 mph),  
then repeat steps 1 through 4.  
N
4L  
Shifting from 4L (4WD Low) to 4H (4WD High) or 2H (2WD High)  
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.  
2. Depress the brake.  
3. Place the gearshift lever in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or  
depress the clutch (manual transmission).  
4. Move the transfer case shift lever  
through N (Neutral) directly to 4H  
(4WD High) or 2H (2WD High).  
2H  
4H  
5. If the transfer case will not  
disengage from 4L (4WD Low), drive  
the vehicle above 8 km/h (5 mph),  
then repeat steps 1 through 4.  
N
4L  
6. If shifting to 2H (2WD High) with  
the vehicle at a complete stop, disengage the locking hubs (optional) by  
rotating the hub lock control from LOCK to FREE.  
Using the N (Neutral) position  
The transfer case neutral position overrides the transmission and  
puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift  
lever position. The vehicle can move forward or backwards.  
132  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
This position should only be used  
when towing the vehicle.  
2H  
4H  
N
4L  
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the  
N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn  
off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.  
Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped)  
Positions of the electronic shift system  
The electronic shift 4WD system is designed to allow up to 45  
seconds before a shift command is performed. In the event that  
conflicting shift commands are selected, allow up to 45 seconds  
for the shift command to be performed prior to reporting any  
shift concerns to your dealer.  
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.  
This is normal.  
2H (2WD High) For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear  
wheels only.  
4H (4WD High) For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to  
front and rear wheels.  
4L (4WD Low)For low-speed off-road applications that require extra  
power such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water.  
Sends power to front and rear wheels.  
133  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Shifting from 2WD (2WD High) to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High)  
Rotate the 4WD control to the  
4x4 HIGH position at speeds up to  
88 km/h (55 mph).  
4X4  
4X4  
LOW  
HIGH  
2WD  
The electronic shift 4WD  
system is designed to engage  
4x4 HIGH (4WD High) when  
the vehicle is moving. If  
shifted to 4x4 HIGH (4WD  
HIGH) while at complete stop,  
4x4 may not engage and the  
4x4 indicator may not  
illuminate until the vehicle is driven above 8 km/h (5 mph).  
Do not shift into 4x4 HIGH with the rear wheels slipping.  
Shifting from 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) to 2WD (2WD High)  
Rotate the 4WD control to 2WD at  
4X4  
any forward speed. Disengagement  
4X4  
HIGH  
LOW  
2WD  
of the transfer case and front hubs  
may be delayed due to torque bind  
which is caused by driving on dry  
hard surfaces or performing tight  
turns while using the 4WD system.  
You do not need to operate the vehicle in R (Reverse) to disengage  
your front hubs, but it will eliminate any torque bind and allow the  
system to immediately disengage.  
Shifting from 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) to 4x4 LOW (4WD Low)  
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.  
2. Depress the brake.  
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or depress  
the clutch (manual transmission).  
134  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4x4  
LOW position.  
5. Hold the shift conditions until the  
LOW RANGE indicator light  
illuminates.  
6. If the LOW RANGE indicator light  
does not illuminate within 15  
seconds, drive the vehicle above  
8 km/h (5 mph), then repeat steps 1  
through 5 before reporting any shift  
concerns to your dealer.  
Shifting from 4x4 LOW (4WD Low) to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) or 2WD  
(2WD High)  
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.  
2. Depress the brake.  
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or depress  
the clutch (manual transmission).  
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4x4  
HIGH (4WD High) or 2WD (2WD  
High) position.  
5. Hold the shift conditions until the  
LOW RANGE indicator light shuts  
off.  
6. If the LOW RANGE indicator light  
does not shut off within 15  
seconds, drive the vehicle above  
8 km/h (5 mph), then repeat steps 1  
through 5 before reporting any shift concerns to your dealer.  
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles  
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and  
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat  
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.  
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles  
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your  
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without  
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.  
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle  
differently than an ordinary passenger car.  
135  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.  
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel  
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not  
grip the spokes.  
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as  
rocks and stumps.  
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before  
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain  
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four  
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.  
Basic operating principles  
Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce  
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.  
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose  
surfaces.  
Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering  
characteristics of your vehicle.  
Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by  
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.  
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement  
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but  
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the  
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering  
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.  
It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow  
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose  
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too  
sharply or abruptly.  
It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway  
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a  
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide  
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the  
safety of others should be your primary concern.  
136  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and  
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a  
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not  
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more  
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under  
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt  
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in  
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal  
injury and death.  
If your vehicle gets stuck  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by  
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a  
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.  
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating  
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.  
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage  
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may  
overheat.  
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is  
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and  
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.  
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp  
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.  
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.  
Do not spin the wheels at over 56 km/h (35 mph). The tires may  
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.  
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster  
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.  
137  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Emergency maneuvers  
In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn  
must be made, remember to avoid over-drivingyour vehicle, i.e.,  
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid  
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,  
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or  
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are  
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could  
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover  
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the  
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.  
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not  
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.  
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and  
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a  
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not  
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more  
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under  
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt  
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in  
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal  
injury and death.  
If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from  
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle  
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,  
avoid these abrupt inputs.  
Parking  
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)  
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of  
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic  
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not  
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral)  
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition  
when leaving the vehicle.  
4WD Systems  
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode), uses all four wheels to power the  
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and  
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.  
138  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Power is supplied to all four wheels  
through a transfer case. On 4WD  
vehicles, the transfer case allows  
you to select 4WD when necessary.  
Information on transfer case  
operation and shifting procedures  
can be found in the Driving  
chapter. Information on transfer  
case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and specifications  
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information  
before you operate your vehicle.  
Normal characteristics  
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while  
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting  
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the  
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.  
Sand  
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid  
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower  
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly  
and avoid spinning the wheels.  
If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make  
sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible.  
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you  
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may  
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back  
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.  
Mud and water  
If you must drive through high  
water, drive slowly. Traction or  
brake capability may be limited.  
When driving through water,  
determine the depth; avoid water  
higher than the bottom of the hubs  
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If  
the ignition system gets wet, the  
vehicle may stall.  
139  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the  
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving  
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.  
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you  
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As  
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid  
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of  
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.  
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,  
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.  
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.  
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster  
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.  
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should  
be replaced.  
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts  
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an  
imbalance that could damage drive components.  
Tread Lightlyis an educational  
program designed to increase public  
awareness of land-use regulations  
and responsibilities in our nations  
wilderness areas. Ford Motor  
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land  
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and  
other public and private lands by treading lightly.”  
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain  
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up  
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up  
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep  
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and  
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand  
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without  
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse  
over a hill without the aid of an observer.  
140  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
When climbing a steep slope or hill,  
start in a lower gear rather than  
downshifting to a lower gear from a  
higher gear once the ascent has  
started. This reduces strain on the  
engine and the possibility of stalling.  
If you do stall out, do not try to  
turn around because you might roll  
over. It is better to back down to a  
safe location.  
Apply just enough power to the  
wheels to climb the hill. Too much  
power will cause the tires to slip,  
spin or lose traction, resulting in  
loss of vehicle control.  
Descend a hill in the same gear you  
would use to climb up the hill to  
avoid excessive brake application  
and brake overheating. Do not  
descend in neutral; instead,  
disengage overdrive or manually  
shift to a lower gear. When  
descending a steep hill, avoid  
sudden hard braking as you could  
lose control. When you brake hard,  
the front wheels cant turn and if  
they arent turning, you wont be  
able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the  
vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle  
and still maintain steering control.  
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not  
pumpthe brakes.  
Driving on snow and ice  
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but  
can skid like any other vehicle.  
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the  
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.  
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on  
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting  
from a full stop.  
141  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate  
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it wont stop any  
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do  
not become overconfident as to road conditions.  
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles  
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower  
gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the wheels. Use  
a squeezetechnique, push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing  
force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you  
may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels,  
release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. If your vehicle  
is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), apply the  
brake steadily. Do not pumpthe brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of  
this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock  
brake system.  
Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also  
putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and  
swing around during braking.  
Tires, Replacement Requirements  
Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel other than that  
originally provided by Ford Motor Company because it can affect  
the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, and/or serious  
personal injury or death.  
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,  
tread design, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you have questions  
regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford or Lincoln/Mercury  
dealer.  
If you nevertheless decide to equip your 4WD for off-road use with tires  
larger than what Ford Motor Company recommends, you should not use  
these tires for highway driving.  
If you use any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Ford Motor  
Company, it may adversely affect vehicle handling and could cause  
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case failure as well as the increased  
risk of loss of vehicle control.  
Do not use aftermarket lift kitsor other suspension modifications,  
whether or not they are used with larger tires and wheels.  
These aftermarket lift kitscould adversely affect the vehicles handling  
characteristics, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or rollover and  
serious injury.  
142  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Tires can be damaged during off-road use. For your safety, tires that are  
damaged should not be used for highway driving because they are more  
likely to blow out or fail.  
You should carefully observe the recommended tire inflation pressure  
found on the safety compliance certification label attached to the left  
front door lock facing or door latch post pillar. Failure to follow tire  
pressure recommendations can adversely affect the way your vehicle  
handles. Do not exceed the Ford Motor Company recommended pressure  
even if it is less than the maximum pressure allowed for the tire.  
Each day before you drive, check  
your tires. If one looks lower than  
the others, use a tire gauge to check  
pressure of all tires, and adjust if  
required. Check tire pressure with a  
tire gauge every few weeks  
(including spare). Safe operation  
requires tires that are neither  
underinflated nor a vehicle which is  
overloaded.  
Periodically inspect the tire treads and remove stones, nails, glass or  
other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes  
or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary  
repairs.  
Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If internal  
damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected  
in case it needs to be repaired or replaced.  
Maintenance and Modifications  
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed  
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty  
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor  
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such  
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by  
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.  
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make  
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.  
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle  
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box  
cover).  
143  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase  
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities  
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of  
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to  
heavy off-road usage.  
POWER TAKE OFF (PTO) CAPABILITY (IF EQUIPPED)  
Some vehicles are equipped with Power Take Off (PTO) capability. These  
vehicles have a special transmission case, internal components and  
calibration for PTO usage.  
The PTO can be used during mobile and stationary  
continuous/intermittent applications.  
Gasoline engine:  
PTO operation is disabled while the vehicle is in Overdrive (the TCIL will  
not be illuminated), in N (Neutral), during engine cranking. Transmission  
upshift and downshift schedules will be reduced by about 15% and will  
have a firmer shift feel during PTO mobile applications.  
The PTO cannot be disabled while the transmission is in D (Drive)  
(Overdrive position with Overdrive canceled), 2 (Second) or 1 (First).  
Refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for recommended electrical  
installation.  
Diesel engine:  
The Auxiliary Powertrain Control Module (APCM) will elevate the engine  
speed to 1,200 RPM when in PTO mode. PTO operation will be disabled  
in stationary drive idle conditions. For more information on the APCM  
and PTO operation with the Diesel engine, refer to the APCM manual  
supplied with your vehicle.  
DRIVING THROUGH WATER  
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very  
slowly especially if the depth is not known. Never drive through water  
that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of  
the wheel rims (for cars). Traction or brake capability may be limited  
and your vehicle may stall. Water may also enter your engines air intake  
and severely damage your engine.  
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle  
slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Wet brakes do  
not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes. Driving through deep  
water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow  
water into the transmission and cause internal transmission  
damage.  
144  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
VEHICLE LOADING  
Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms:  
Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard  
equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include occupants or  
aftermarket equipment.  
Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants  
and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight  
rating minus base curb weight.  
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload  
weight.  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum allowable total  
weight of the base vehicle, occupants, optional equipment and cargo.  
The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety  
Certification Label on the drivers door pillar.  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle  
system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the  
Safety Certification Label on the drivers door pillar.  
GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the  
towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer.  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum allowable  
combined weight of towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo)  
and the loaded trailer.  
Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the  
vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is  
determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each  
engine/transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer  
towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing  
vehicle.  
Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded  
vehicle (including occupants and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is  
determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing  
vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle.  
Trailer Weight Range: Specified range of trailer weight from zero to  
the maximum trailer weight rating.  
Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when  
figuring the total weight.  
The Safety Certification Label, located on the drivers door pillar, lists  
vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding any additional equipment,  
refer to these limitations.  
145  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Always ensure that the weight of occupants, cargo and equipment is  
within the weight limitations, including both gross vehicle weight and  
front and rear gross axle weight rating limits.  
Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the  
certification label.  
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in  
serious damage to the vehicle, loss of vehicle control, vehicle  
rollover, and/or personal injury.  
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the  
originals because they may lower the vehicles GVWR and GAWR  
limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do  
not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.  
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and  
utility-type vehicles  
For important information regarding safe operation of this type  
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in  
this chapter.  
Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles.  
Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping  
distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.  
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.  
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and  
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.  
Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow  
1. Use the appropriate maximum GCWR chart (in the Trailer Towing  
section in this chapter) for your type of engine and rear axle ratio.  
2. Weigh your vehicle without cargo. To obtain correct weights, take your  
vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks.  
3. Subtract your loaded weight from the maximum GCWR in the chart.  
This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow. It must be  
below the maximum trailer weight shown in the chart.  
TRAILER TOWING  
Your vehicle may tow a Conventional/Class IV trailer or fifth wheel trailer  
provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the  
maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the  
following charts.  
146  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
2nd unit bodies are not included in maximum trailer weight ratings. The  
weight of the additional bodymust be subtracted from the maximum  
trailer weight.  
Your vehicles load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so  
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.  
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicles engine,  
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these  
components carefully prior to and after any towing operation. The  
following trailer towing charts apply to vehicles equipped with gasoline  
engines; for Diesel engines, refer to the Diesel supplement.  
Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the  
certification label.  
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer  
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in  
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle  
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.  
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster  
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.  
F-250 Regular Cab Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3537 (7800)  
4217 (9300)  
4807 (10600)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6394 (14100)  
147  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-250 Regular Cab Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3537 (7800)  
4217 (9300)  
5079 (11200)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6439 (14200)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3357 (7400)  
4037 (8900)  
4625 (10200)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6213 (13700)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3356 (7400)  
4036 (8900)  
4897 (10800)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6258 (13800)  
148  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-250 SuperCab Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3356 (7400)  
4036 (8900)  
4672 (10300)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6260 (13800)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3402 (7500)  
4082 (9000)  
4944 (10900)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6260 (13800)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3221 (7100)  
3901 (8600)  
4491 (9900)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6078 (13400)  
149  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-250 SuperCab Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3221 (7100)  
3901 (8600)  
4763 (10500)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6078 (13400)  
F-250 Crew Cab Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3266 (7200)  
3945 (8700)  
4581 (10100)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6169 (13600)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3266 (7200)  
3945 (8700)  
4807 (10600)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6169 (13600)  
150  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-250 Crew Cab Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3083 (6800)  
3764 (8300)  
4400 (9700)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
5987 (13200)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3130 (6900)  
3810 (8400)  
4625 (10200)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
5957 (13200)  
F-350 Regular Cab Single Rear Wheel Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3538 (7800)  
4218 (9300)  
4807 (10600)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6394 (14100)  
151  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 Regular Cab Single Rear Wheel Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3537 (7800)  
4218 (9300)  
5080 (11200)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6441 (14200)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3357 (7400)  
4037 (8900)  
4625 (10200)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6213 (13700)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3356 (7400)  
4036 (8900)  
4899 (10800)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6260 (13800)  
152  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 Regular Cab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3401 (7500)  
4081 (9000)  
4672 (10300)  
6260 (13800)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3447 (7600)  
4081 (9000)  
4944 (10900)  
6305 (13900)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3221 (7100)  
3901 (8600)  
4491 (9900)  
6078 (13400)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3266 (7200)  
3946 (8700)  
4716 (10400)  
6078 (13400)  
153  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 SuperCab Single Rear Wheel Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3356 (7400)  
4126 (8900)  
4672 (10300)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6260 (13800)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3402 (7500)  
4082 (9000)  
4897 (10800)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6260 (13800)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3221 (7100)  
3901 (8600)  
4491 (9900)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6078 (13400)  
154  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 SuperCab Single Rear Wheel Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3221 (7100)  
3901 (8600)  
4716 (10400)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6078 (13400)  
F-350 SuperCab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3266 (7200)  
3946 (8700)  
4536 (10000)  
6123 (13500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel,  
with  
optional  
14,000 lb.  
hitch)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6123 (13500)  
155  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 SuperCab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3266 (7200)  
3946 (8700)  
4763 (10500)  
6123 (13500)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel,  
with  
optional  
14,000 lb.  
hitch)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6123 (13500)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3083 (6800)  
3764 (8300)  
4353 (9600)  
5941 (13100)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel,  
with  
optional  
14,000 lb  
hitch)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
5941 (13100)  
156  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 SuperCab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3083 (6800)  
3764 (8300)  
4580 (10100)  
5941 (13100)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel,  
with  
optional  
14,000 lb.  
hitch)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
5941 (13100)  
F-350 Crew Cab Single Rear Wheel Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
Maximum GCWR -  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
ratio  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3266 (7200)  
3946 (8700)  
4581 (10100)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L (without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6169 (13600)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3265 (7200)  
3945 (8700)  
4808 (10600)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L (without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6169 (13600)  
157  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 Crew Cab Single Rear Wheel Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
Maximum GCWR -  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
ratio  
kg (lbs.)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3083 (6800)  
3764 (8300)  
4399 (9700)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L (without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
5987 (13200)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3130 (6900)  
3810 (8400)  
4625 (10200)  
5670 (12500)  
6.8L (without  
fifth wheel)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
5987 (13200)  
F-350 Crew Cab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.30  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
4445 (9800)  
6033 (13300)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel,  
with  
optional  
14,000 lb.  
hitch)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6033 (13300)  
158  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 Crew Cab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.30  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
4672 (10300)  
6033 (13300)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel,  
with  
optional  
14,000 lb.  
hitch)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
6033 (13300)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.30  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
4263 (9400)  
5850 (12900)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel,  
with  
optional  
14,000 lb.  
hitch)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
5850 (12900)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.30  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
4491 (9900)  
5850 (12900)  
6.8L  
(without  
fifth wheel,  
with  
optional  
14,000 lb.  
hitch)  
6.8L (with  
fifth wheel)  
4.30  
9072 (20000)  
5851 (12900)  
159  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
3266 (7200)  
3946 (8700)  
4581 (10100)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
3311 (7300)  
3992 (8800)  
4808 (10600)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
3084 (6800)  
3765 (8300)  
4400 (9700)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
3084 (6800)  
3765 (8300)  
4627 (10200)  
F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3130 (6900)  
3810 (8400)  
4400 (9700)  
5987 (13200)  
160  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
3175 (7000)  
3856 (8500)  
4672 (10300)  
6033 (13300)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
2903 (6400)  
3583 (7900)  
4172 (9200)  
5759 (12700)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
4.30  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
2948 (6500)  
3629 (8000)  
4445 (9800)  
5806 (12800)  
F-350 SuperCab Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
3130 (6900)  
3810 (8400)  
4400 (9700)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
3130 (6900)  
3810 (8400)  
4671 (10300)  
161  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 SuperCab Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
2903 (6400)  
3583 (7900)  
4218 (9300)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
2948 (6500)  
3629 (8000)  
4445 (9800)  
F-350 SuperCab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.30  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
4264 (9400)  
5851 (12900)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.30  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
4491 (9900)  
5851 (12900)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.30  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
4082 (9000)  
5670 (12500)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.30  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
4309 (9500)  
5670 (12500)  
162  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 Crew Cab Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
3039 (6700)  
3719 (8200)  
4309 (9500)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
3039 (6700)  
3719 (8200)  
4580 (10100)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7484 (16500)  
2812 (6200)  
3493 (7700)  
4128 (9100)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
3.73  
6123 (13500)  
6804 (15000)  
7711 (17000)  
2858 (6300)  
3538 (7800)  
4354 (9600)  
F-350 Crew Cab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.30  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
4173 (9200)  
5761 (12700)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.30  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
4400 (9700)  
5761 (12700)  
163  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-350 Crew Cab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.30  
7484 (16500)  
9072 (20000)  
3946 (8700)  
5534 (12200)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.30  
7711 (17000)  
9072 (20000)  
4172 (9200)  
5532 (12200)  
F-450 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
4.88/5.38 9979 (22000)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6577 (14500)  
6.8L  
6.8L  
4.88  
5.38  
10886 (24000)  
11793 (26000)  
7530 (16600)  
8437 (18600)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
4.88/5.38 9979 (22000)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6441 (14200)  
6.8L  
6.8L  
4.88  
5.38  
10886 (24000)  
11793 (26000)  
7394 (16300)  
8301 (18300)  
164  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-450 SuperCab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
4.88/5.38 9979 (22000)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6441 (14200)  
6.8L  
6.8L  
4.88  
5.38  
10886 (24000)  
11793 (26000)  
7348 (16200)  
8255 (18200)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
4.88/5.38 9979 (22000)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6260 (13800)  
6.8L  
6.8L  
4.88  
5.38  
10886 (24000)  
11793 (26000)  
7167 (15800)  
8074 (17800)  
F-450 Crew Cab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with manual transmission  
4.88/5.38 9979 (22000)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6350 (14000)  
6.8L  
6.8L  
4.88  
5.38  
10886 (24000)  
11793 (26000)  
7257 (16000)  
8165 (18000)  
4x4 with manual transmission  
4.88/5.38 9979 (22000)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6214 (13700)  
6.8L  
6.8L  
4.88  
5.38  
10886 (24000)  
11793 (26000)  
7121 (15700)  
8029 (17700)  
165  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
F-550 Regular Cab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
4.88  
5.38  
10886 (24000)  
11793 (26000)  
7484 (16500)  
8391 (18500)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
4.88  
5.38  
10886 (24000)  
11793 (26000)  
7348 (16200)  
8255 (18200)  
F-550 SuperCab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
4.88  
5.38  
10886 (24000)  
11793 (26000)  
7348 (16200)  
8255 (18200)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
4.88  
5.38  
10886 (24000)  
11793 (26000)  
7121 (15700)  
8029 (17700)  
F-550 Crew Cab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel  
Towing)  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum GCWR -  
kg (lbs.)  
Maximum  
trailer weight -  
kg (lbs.)  
4x2 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
4.88  
5.38  
10886 (24000)  
11793 (26000)  
7212 (15900)  
8119 (17900)  
4x4 with automatic transmission  
6.8L  
6.8L  
4.88  
5.38  
10886 (24000)  
11793 (26000)  
7076 (15600)  
7983 (17600)  
166  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Preparing to tow  
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is  
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer  
dealer if you require assistance.  
Hitches  
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicles bumper or attach to the  
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%15% of the  
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.  
Load equalizing hitch  
When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the  
following procedure:  
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and  
all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it  
can level.  
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers  
at the center of the vehicle.  
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that  
the front bumper height is within 013 mm (0.5 in) of the reference  
point. After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher  
than in Step 2.  
Note: Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle is  
higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the load  
equalizing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling.  
Safety chains  
Always connect the trailers safety chains to the frame or hook retainers  
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailers safety chains, cross the  
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.  
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency  
gives to you.  
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.  
Trailer brakes  
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are  
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturers  
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal  
regulations.  
167  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Do not connect a trailers hydraulic brake system directly to your  
vehicles brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough  
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.  
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the  
GVWR not GCWR.  
Trailer lamps  
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure your  
trailer lamps conform to local and Federal regulations. See your dealer or  
trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking  
up trailer lamps.  
Using a step bumper (if equipped)  
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a  
ball with a 25.4 mm (one inch) shank diameter. The bumper has a 2,270  
kg (5,000 lb.) trailer weight and 227 kg (500 lb.) tongue weight capacity.  
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a  
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed.  
Driving while you tow  
When towing a trailer:  
Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off  
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.  
Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.  
If your vehicle is equipped with a 4speed automatic  
transmission: To eliminate excessive transmission shifting, use a  
lower gear. This will also assist in transmission cooling. (For additional  
information, refer to the Understanding the positions of the 4speed  
automatic transmission section in this chapter.  
If your vehicle is equipped with a 5speed automatic  
transmission: To eliminate excessive transmission shifting, activate  
the Tow/Haul feature. This will also assist in transmission cooling. (For  
additional information, refer to the Understanding the positions of  
the 5speed automatic transmission section in this chapter.  
Anticipate stops and brake gradually.  
Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.  
Servicing after towing  
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more  
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for  
more information.  
168  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Trailer towing tips  
Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to  
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make  
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.  
Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.  
The trailer tongue weight should be 1015% of the loaded trailer  
weight.  
After you have traveled 80 km (50 miles), thoroughly check your  
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.  
To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot  
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)  
(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions).  
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must  
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailers wheels.  
Launching or retrieving a boat  
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval,  
Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of  
the rear bumper.  
Do not allow waves to break higher than 15 cm (6 inches) above the  
bottom edge of the rear bumper.  
Disconnect the trailer tow electrical connector to prevent blown fuses  
caused by water entering into your trailers electrical wiring.  
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle  
components, adversely affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.  
Replace front and rear axle lubricants any time the axles have been  
submerged in water. Axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked  
unless a leak is suspected.  
ALL REAR WHEEL DRIVE (RWD) VEHICLES  
This applies to all cars and 4x2 trucks/sport utilities with rear wheel  
drive capability.  
An example of recreational towing is towing your vehicle behind a  
motorhome. The following recreational towing guidelines are designed to  
ensure that your transmission is not damaged.  
Place the transmission in N (Neutral).  
169  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Maximum speed is 56 km/h (35 mph).  
Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles).  
If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km/h (35 mph) must  
be exceeded, you must disconnect the driveshaft. Ford recommends the  
driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your  
local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.  
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause  
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal  
transmission components.  
RWD vehicles with 4x4 electronic shift transfer case or All Wheel  
Drive (AWD) vehicles with automatic transmissions:  
Regarding recreational towing or having your vehicle towed, 4x4 vehicles  
with electronic shift on the fly and AWD vehicles cannot be towed with  
any wheels on the ground (with the exception of moving it as a disabled  
vehicle off the road out of traffic).  
SNOWPLOWING  
Note: Do not use your vehicle to snowplow until it has been driven at  
least 800 km (500 miles). Follow the severe duty schedule in your  
scheduled maintenance guide for engine oil and transmission fluid  
change intervals.  
Note: Ford does not install snowplows.  
For low speed snow removal, Ford offers a Snowplow Package Option on  
select 4x4 vehicles. To assist Ford dealers and equipment installers  
further prepare the vehicle for snowplowing, Ford includes instructions  
in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book and Ford Truck Source  
Book. These instructions are available through your Ford dealer; they  
include the list of vehicle models recommended for snowplowing and  
snowplow weight limits. Use of the Snowplow Package Option, or its  
equivalent, along with these instructions will help avoid possible  
powertrain and chassis damage from snowplowing.  
The front and rear GAWR, GVWR, Total Accessory Reserve Capacity  
(TARC) and tire inflation pressures are found on the Safety Compliance  
Certification Label located on one of the vehicles door jambs. This label  
is applied to all vehicles completed by Ford Motor Company. Incomplete  
vehicles built by Ford Motor Company will have an Incomplete Vehicle  
Label in place of the Safety Compliance Label. The TARC does not apply  
to Incomplete Vehicles and will not be shown on the Incomplete Vehicle  
Label. The weight of the vehicle with occupants must never exceed the  
front and rear GAWR or the GVWR.  
170  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
The TARC is the weight of the permanently attached equipment that can  
be added to the vehicle without violating the vehicles Safety Compliance  
Certification. This includes the snowplow mounting hardware but does  
not include the removable portion of the snowplow assembly.  
Installing the snowplow  
Read the following instructions before installing a snowplow:  
Front GAWR must not exceed 63% of the GVW. Add ballast weight to  
the back of the vehicle, if necessary. Refer to the Safety Compliance  
Certification Label to find your vehicles front GAWR.  
The Front Axle Accessory Reserve Capacity and the TARC listed on  
the bottom right of the Safety Compliance Certification Label will  
determine whether or not the addition of a snowplow will overload  
your vehicle.  
The weight of the snowplow and supporting components distributed to  
the front axle must not exceed the Front Axle Accessory Reserve  
Capacity.  
The total weight of the snowplow and aftermarket equipment must  
not exceed the TARC.  
The weight of the installed snowplow and aftermarket equipment must  
not load the vehicle beyond the GAWR (front/rear) and GVWR listed  
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.  
The total weight of the snowplow and aftermarket equipment must be  
considered part of the payload and must not exceed the GCWR for  
towing.  
Federal and most local regulations require additional exterior lamps  
for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your dealer for additional  
information.  
Tires have their maximum inflation pressure and associated load rating  
imprinted on the tire sidewall. This pressure may or may not be the  
same as that shown as recommended on the vehicle. The vehicle  
operator may have to adjust the tire inflation pressure to  
accommodate the snowplow and payload. Consult your dealer or  
equipment installer for help with proper inflation pressures.  
Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps  
for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your dealer for additional  
information.  
After installing a snowplow to the vehicle, ensure the vehicles front  
toe alignment and front ride height are within specification (reset if  
required). These specifications are located in the vehicles Workshop  
Manual.  
171  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the  
certification label.  
Removing snowplow  
After removing a snowplow from the vehicle, ensure the vehicles front  
toe alignment and front ride height are within specification (reset if  
required).  
Snowplowing with your air bag-equipped vehicle  
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger air bag  
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) The SRS is designed to activate in  
certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains  
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.  
Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in  
sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the air bag. Such driving also  
increases the risk of accidents.  
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always  
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is  
provided.  
Never remove or defeat the tripping mechanismsdesigned into the  
snow removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause  
damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as  
possible air bag deployment.  
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag  
Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your Ford or  
Lincoln Mercury dealer.  
Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect  
the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of  
injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions  
about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.  
Engine temperature while plowing  
When driving with a snowplow, your engine may run at a higher  
temperature than normal because the attached snowplow blade will  
restrict airflow to the radiator.  
If you are driving more than 24 km (15 miles) at temperatures above  
freezing, angle the plow blade either full left or full right to provide  
maximum airflow to the radiator.  
172  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
If you are driving less than 24 km (15 miles) at speeds up to 64 km/h  
(40 mph) in cold weather, you will not need to worry about blade  
position to provide maximum airflow.  
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster  
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.  
4WD operation while plowing  
Shift transfer case to 4x4 LOW (4WD Low) when plowing in small  
areas at speeds below 8 km/h (5 mph).  
Shift transfer case to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) when plowing larger areas  
or light snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 24 km/h (15 mph).  
Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until  
the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped.  
If the vehicle is stuck, shift the transmission in a steady motion  
between forward and reverse gears. Do not rock the vehicle for more  
than a few minutes. The transmission and tires may be damaged or  
the engine can overheat.  
It is the owners responsibility to avoid engine overheating which  
can cause damage.  
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster  
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.  
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). The tires may  
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.  
173  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Roadside Emergencies  
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE  
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor  
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This  
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service  
is available:  
24hours, seven days a week  
for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or  
60,000 km (36,000 miles), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury  
vehicles, and four years or 80,000 km (50,000 miles) on Lincoln  
vehicles.  
Roadside assistance will cover:  
changing a flat tire  
jump-starts  
lock-out assistance  
limited fuel delivery  
towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company  
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 56.3 km (35 miles) of the  
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).  
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the  
mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound  
towing or repossession).  
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for  
information on:  
coverage period  
exact fuel amounts  
towing of your disabled vehicle  
emergency travel expense reimbursement  
travel planning benefits  
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE  
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your  
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the  
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is  
mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is  
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.  
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,  
call 18002413673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 18005214140.  
174  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call  
18006652006.  
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor  
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement  
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call  
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 18005214140.  
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call  
18006652006.  
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY  
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance  
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting  
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.  
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you  
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warrantys Roadside  
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact  
18772942582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.  
HAZARD FLASHER  
The hazard flasher is located on the  
steering column, just behind the  
steering wheel. The hazard flashers  
will operate when the ignition is in  
any position.  
Push in the flasher control and all  
front and rear direction signals will  
flash. Press the flasher control again  
to turn them off. Use it when your  
vehicle is disabled and is creating a  
safety hazard for other motorists.  
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.  
FUEL  
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH  
RESET  
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine  
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.  
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch  
may have been activated.  
175  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
This switch is located in the front  
passengers footwell, by the kick  
panel access cover.  
To reset the switch:  
1. Turn the ignition OFF.  
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.  
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the  
switch by pushing in on the reset  
button.  
4. Turn the ignition ON.  
5. Wait a few seconds and return  
the key to OFF.  
6. Make another check of leaks.  
FUSES AND RELAYS  
Fuses  
If electrical components in the  
vehicle are not working, a fuse may  
have blown. Blown fuses are  
identified by a broken wire within  
the fuse. Check the appropriate  
fuses before replacing any electrical  
components.  
15  
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage  
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire  
damage and could start a fire.  
176  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Standard fuse amperage rating and color  
COLOR  
Cartridge  
maxi  
fuses  
Fuse  
rating  
Mini  
fuses  
Standard  
fuses  
Maxi  
fuses  
Fuse link  
cartridge  
2A  
3A  
4A  
Grey  
Violet  
Pink  
Tan  
Grey  
Violet  
Pink  
Tan  
5A  
7.5A  
10A  
15A  
20A  
25A  
30A  
40A  
50A  
60A  
70A  
80A  
Brown  
Red  
Brown  
Red  
Yellow  
Green  
Orange  
Red  
Blue  
Tan  
Natural  
Blue  
Pink  
Green  
Red  
Blue  
Pink  
Green  
Red  
Yellow  
Brown  
Black  
Blue  
Yellow  
Natural  
Green  
Blue  
Yellow  
Natural  
Green  
Passenger compartment fuse panel / power distribution box  
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by  
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.  
To remove the fuse panel cover,  
turn the panel fasteners  
counterclockwise.  
177  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller  
tool provided on the fuse panel  
cover.  
The fuses are coded as follows.  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
15A*  
Passenger Compartment Fuse  
Panel Description  
Adjustable pedals  
1
2
Not used  
3
Not used  
4
5
20A*  
Power point - instrument panel  
Not used  
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
20A*  
30A*  
15A*  
20A*  
10A*  
20A*  
Trailer tow turn/stop relay  
High beam headlamps/Flash to pass  
Backup lamps (Diesel engine only)  
Heated mirrors  
A/C clutch  
Radio (main)  
178  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
20A*  
5A*  
Passenger Compartment Fuse  
Panel Description  
Cigar lighter / OBD II  
Power mirrors/switches  
Daytime running lamps (DRL)  
Not used  
Not used  
Exterior lamps  
Turn lamps/Brake on-off switch  
(high)  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
15A*  
15A*  
20A*  
19  
20  
10A*  
10A*  
Body security module/4x4 module  
Fuel Injection Control Module  
(FICM) relay (Diesel engine only)  
Not used  
21  
22  
23  
20A*  
20A*  
Engine control  
Engine control (gasoline engine  
only), Climate control (Diesel  
engine only)  
24  
25  
2A*  
Brake pressure switch/Speed  
control  
4-Wheel Anti-lock Brake System  
(4WABS) module, Variable Fan  
Control (VFC) (Diesel engine only)  
Air bags  
Ignition switch Run feed  
EATC module/Front blower relay  
coil  
10A*  
26  
27  
28  
10A*  
15A*  
10A*  
29  
30  
31  
10A*  
15A*  
15A*  
Customer access  
Highbeam headlamps  
Clutch interlock switch (manual  
transmissions only), Transmission  
range sensor (automatic  
transmissions only) then to starter  
relay coil (all transmissions), 4x4  
179  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
5A*  
Passenger Compartment Fuse  
Panel Description  
Radio (start)  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
15A*  
10A*  
10A*  
10A*  
15A*  
20A*  
15A*  
20A*  
10A*  
15A*  
10A*  
Front wiper  
Brake on-off switch  
Instrument cluster  
PCM Memory  
Horn  
Trailer tow park lamps  
Trailer tow back-up lamps  
Fuel pump  
Instrument cluster  
Delayed accessory  
Fog lamps  
Not used  
45  
46  
47  
48  
10A*  
10A*  
10A*  
Ignition switch Run/Start feed  
Left-hand lowbeam  
Right-hand lowbeam  
Not used  
101  
102  
103  
30A**  
30A**  
50A**  
Trailer tow electric brake  
Door locks/Body security module  
Ignition switch (gasoline engine  
only), FICM power (Diesel engine  
only)  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
40A**  
30A**  
30A**  
40A**  
30A**  
50A**  
30A**  
30A**  
Heated backlight  
Fuel heater (Diesel engine only)  
Front wiper main  
Front blower motor  
Not used  
Heated seats  
Ignition switch  
4WD/Shift on the fly  
Left-hand power seats  
180  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
113  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
30A**  
30A**  
20A**  
30A**  
30A CB***  
60A**  
Passenger Compartment Fuse  
Panel Description  
Starter motor  
Right-hand power seats  
Trailer tow battery charge  
Ignition switch  
Window motors, Moonroof  
4WABS module  
Not used  
114  
115  
116  
601  
602  
210  
211  
Backup lamps relay (Diesel engine  
only)  
212  
301  
302  
Not used  
Front blower motor relay  
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)  
relay  
303  
Fuel heater relay (Diesel engine  
only)  
304  
305  
306  
307  
Heated backlight relay  
Trailer tow battery charge relay  
Delayed accessory relay  
Starter relay  
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses ***Circuit Breaker  
Note: (Diesel engine only) The Fuel Injection Control Module (FICM)  
logic 15A mini-fuse is located in the underhood relay block.  
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE  
If you get a flat tire while driving:  
do not brake heavily.  
gradually decrease the vehicles speed.  
hold the steering wheel firmly.  
slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.  
The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may  
compromise the integrity of your tires.  
181  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Spare tire information  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire that can be used as  
either a spare or a regular tire. The spare tire is not equipped with wheel  
trim. The wheel trim from the original wheel/tire may be used on the  
spare.  
If your vehicle is equipped with 4WD, a spare tire of a different  
size than the road tires should not be used. Use of such a tire  
could result in damage to driveline components and an increased risk  
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.  
Location of the spare tire and tools  
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following  
locations:  
Tool  
Location  
Spare tire (pick-up trucks only) Under the vehicle, just forward of  
the rear bumper  
Jack  
Regular cab, crew cab and  
SuperCab without rear bench seat:  
Fastened to floor pan behind  
rearmost seat on passenger side  
SuperCab with rear bench seat:  
Under rear bench on passenger  
side  
Jack handle and lug wrench  
Key, spare tire lock  
On top of the radiator support at  
the front of the engine  
compartment  
In the glove box  
182  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Removing the spare tire (with spare tire carrier only)  
1. The following tools are required to remove the spare tire:  
one handle extension and one  
typical extension. To assemble,  
align button with hole and slide  
parts together. To disconnect,  
depress button and pull apart.  
one wheel nut wrench. Slide over  
square end of jack handle.  
Vehicles equipped with dual  
rear wheels, insert the lug  
wrench extension into the lug  
wrench to reach the lug nuts.  
2. Attach the spare tire lock key (A)  
to the jack handle (B).  
183  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Fully insert the jack handle  
through the bumper hole and into  
the guide tube. The key and lock  
will engage with a slight push and  
counterclockwise turn. Some  
resistance will be felt when turning  
the jack handle assembly.  
4. Turn the handle counterclockwise  
and lower the spare tire until you  
can slide the tire rearward and the  
cable is slack.  
5. Remove the retainer through the center of the wheel.  
Tire change procedure  
1. Park on a level surface, activate  
hazard flashers and set the parking  
brake.  
Automatic transmission: Place  
gearshift lever in P (Park).  
Manual transmission: Place  
gearshift lever in R (Reverse).  
Electronic Shift On the Fly 4WD:  
Place transfer case in any  
position.  
Manual shift transfer case 4WD:  
Place transfer case in 2H, 4H or  
4L.  
To prevent the vehicle from  
moving when you change a  
tire, be sure the parking brake is  
set, then block (in both  
directions) the wheel that is  
diagonally opposite (other side  
and end of the vehicle) to the tire  
being changed.  
2. Turn engine off and block the diagonally opposite wheel (block not  
provided).  
184  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug wrench and spare tire from the  
stowage locations.  
4. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim.  
5. Loosen each wheel lug nut  
one-half turn counterclockwise but  
do not remove them until the wheel  
is raised off the ground.  
When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the transmission  
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the  
jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)  
or R (Reverse) (manual transmission). To prevent the vehicle from  
moving when you change the tire, be sure that the parking brake is set  
and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked.  
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be  
seriously injured.  
The following steps apply to F250/F350 only:  
6. Insert the hooked end of the jack  
handle into the jack and use the  
handle to slide the jack under the  
vehicle.  
7. Position the jack according to the  
following guides:  
185  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Front (4x2)  
Front passenger side (4x4)  
Front driver side (4x4)  
Make sure the jack fits into the  
notched area next to the differential  
housing.  
186  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Rear  
Never use the front or rear  
differential as a jacking point.  
To lessen the risk of  
personal injury, do not put  
any part of your body under the  
vehicle while changing a tire. Do  
not start the engine when your  
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is  
only meant for changing the tire.  
8. Turn the jack handle clockwise  
until the wheel is completely off the  
ground and high enough to install  
the spare tire.  
9. Remove the lug nuts with the lug  
wrench.  
10. Replace the flat tire with the  
spare tire, making sure the valve  
stem is facing outward for all front wheels and single rear wheel vehicles.  
If replacing an inboard rear tire on dual rear wheel vehicles, the valve  
stem must be facing outward. If replacing the outboard wheel, the valve  
stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is  
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel  
has been lowered.  
11. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.  
Go to step 19.  
187  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
The following steps apply to F350 Chassis Cab F450/F550 only:  
12. Slide the notched end of the  
jack handle over the release valve  
and use the handle to slide the jack  
under the vehicle. Make sure the  
valve is closed by turning it  
clockwise.  
13. Position the jack according to  
the following guides:  
Front (4x2) F350  
Front (4x2) F450/550  
Front driver side (4x4)  
188  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Front passenger side (4x4)  
Rear  
14. Insert the jack handle into the  
pump linkage.  
15. Use an up-and-down motion  
with the jack handle to raise the  
wheel completely off the ground.  
Hydraulic jacks are equipped  
with a pressure release valve  
that prevents lifting loads which  
exceed the jacks rated capacity.  
16. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.  
17. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem  
is facing outward on all front an inboard rear wheels. If replacing the  
outboard wheel, the valve stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug  
nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug  
nuts until the wheel has been lowered.  
18. Lower the wheel by slowly turning the release valve  
counterclockwise. Opening the release valve slowly will provide a more  
controlled rate of descent.  
189  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
The following steps apply to all vehicles:  
19. Remove the jack and fully  
tighten the lug nuts in the order  
shown.  
1
2
6
8
7
20. Stow the flat tire. Refer to  
Stowing the spare tire if the  
vehicle is equipped with a spare tire  
carrier.  
4
3
5
21. Stow the jack, jack handle and  
lug wrench. Make sure the jack is  
securely fastened so it does not  
rattle when driving.  
22. Unblock the wheels.  
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to  
the specified torque at 800 km (500 miles) after any wheel disturbance  
(tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).  
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug  
nuts to the specified torque at 160 km (100 miles), and again at  
800 km (500 miles) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel  
disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).  
Bolt size  
Wheel lug nut torque*  
Nm  
Lb-ft  
M14 x 1.5  
200-225  
150-165  
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and  
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.  
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts,  
apply one drop of motor oil between  
the flat washer and the nut. Do not  
apply motor oil to the wheel nut  
threads or the wheel stud threads.  
190  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or  
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel  
or the surface of the front disc brake hub and rotor that contacts the  
wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the  
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the  
wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of  
control.  
Stowing the flat/spare tire  
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in  
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.  
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction  
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack  
hardware.  
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer  
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at  
the end of the cable.  
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed  
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle  
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when  
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your  
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare  
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier  
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your dealer for  
assistance at your earliest convenience.  
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly  
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not  
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the  
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.  
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire  
pressure (every six months, per scheduled maintenance guide), or at any  
time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other  
components.  
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper  
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.  
191  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,  
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or  
vehicle damage.  
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and  
clothing, if contacted.  
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic  
transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may  
damage the catalytic converter.  
Preparing your vehicle  
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the  
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission  
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and  
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the  
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.  
1. Use only a 12volt supply to start your vehicle.  
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could  
damage the vehicles electrical system.  
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle  
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on  
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving  
parts.  
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before  
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.  
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical  
surges. Turn all other accessories off.  
192  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Connecting the jumper cables  
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of  
the discharged battery.  
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the  
assisting (boosting) battery.  
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)  
terminal of the assisting battery.  
193  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the  
assisting battery.  
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed  
metal part of the stalled vehicles engine, away from the battery and the  
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker  
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.  
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)  
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an  
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.  
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of  
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.  
Jump starting  
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at  
moderately increased speed.  
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.  
194  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an  
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.  
Removing the jumper cables  
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were  
connected.  
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.  
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the  
assisting (boosting) battery.  
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the  
booster vehicles battery.  
195  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster  
vehicles battery.  
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the  
disabled vehicles battery.  
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables  
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can  
relearn its idle conditions.  
196  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
WRECKER TOWING  
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing  
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your  
roadside assistance service provider.  
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels  
on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground using a wheel lift or a  
slingbelt with T-hooks.  
On 4x4 vehicles it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with  
flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. However, a wheel  
lift or slingbelt may be used in conjunction with a wheel dolly so that all  
four wheels are off the ground.  
197  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
An alternative for towing a 4x4 vehicle (with gasoline engine only) with a  
manual 4WD system is to:  
put the transfer case in neutral, then put the 4WD shift lever in N  
(Neutral).  
unlock the front hub locks (refer to Four wheel drive [4WD]  
Operation [if equipped] in the Driving chapter).  
lift the rear wheels of the vehicle using a wheel lift or a sling belt with  
T-hooks.  
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle  
damage may occur.  
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow  
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for  
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.  
198  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance  
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED  
At home  
Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to  
service your vehicle. It is preferred that you return to the authorized  
dealer where your vehicle was purchased when warranty repairs are  
needed. However, you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor  
Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs.  
Repairs can be made at Lincoln Mercury dealers, however Jaguar, Land  
Rover, Mazda, Volvo and Aston Martin dealers are not qualified to  
perform Superduty repairs. Certain warranty repairs require special  
training though, so not all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty  
repairs. That means that depending on the warranty repair needed, the  
vehicle may need to be taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership  
cannot assist you, then contact the Customer Relationship Center.  
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you  
are receiving, follow these steps:  
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your  
selling/servicing dealership.  
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales  
Manager or Service Manager at the dealership.  
3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level,  
please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.  
Away from home  
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when  
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership  
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the  
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to  
help you.  
In the United States:  
Ford Motor Company  
Customer Relationship Center  
P.O. Box 6248  
Dearborn, Michigan 48121  
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)  
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)  
www.ford.com, click on contact us”  
In Canada:  
Customer Relationship Centre  
199  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited  
P.O. Box 2000  
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4  
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)  
www.ford.ca  
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle  
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could  
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford  
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help  
you.  
In the United States:  
Ford Motor Company  
Customer Relationship Center  
P.O. Box 6248  
Dearborn, Michigan 48121  
1-800-521-4140  
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)  
www.ford.com, click on contact us”  
In Canada:  
Lincoln Centre  
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited  
P.O. Box 2000  
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4  
1-800-387-9333  
www.lincolncanada.com  
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the  
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:  
Your telephone number (home and business)  
The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located  
The year and make of your vehicle  
The date of vehicle purchase  
The current odometer reading  
The vehicle identification number (VIN)  
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish  
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).  
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing  
before pursuing remedies under your states warranty laws. Ford is also  
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.  
200  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the  
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss  
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing  
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This  
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state  
created rights or other rights which are independent of the  
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.  
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN  
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by  
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP  
is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company  
or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in  
Canada). It provides the following:  
Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you  
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain  
maintenance and wear items).  
Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper  
Warranty expires.  
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln  
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in  
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored  
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement  
benefits for towing and rental coverage.  
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection  
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of  
more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of  
Canada dealers.  
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the  
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this  
information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete  
details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the  
Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.  
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)  
The Dispute Settlement Board is:  
an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.  
available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company  
vehicles.  
201  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford  
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify  
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without  
incurring obligations per applicable state law.  
What kinds of cases does the Board review?  
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as  
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light  
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle  
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:  
a non-Ford product  
a non-Ford dealership  
sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated  
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicles performance as  
designed  
a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a  
service or product concern is being reviewed  
items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including  
maintenance and wear items)  
alleged personal injury/property damage claims  
cases currently in litigation  
vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes  
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to  
review commercial vehicles)  
vehicles with non-U.S. warranties  
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty  
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility  
is dependent upon the customers possession of the vehicle.  
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique  
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin  
purchasers/lessees.  
Board membership  
The Board consists of:  
Three consumer representatives  
A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative  
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by  
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen  
202  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for  
their business leadership qualities.  
What the Board needs  
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the  
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application  
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return  
receipt requested.  
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you  
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:  
The file number assigned to your application.  
The toll-free phone number of the DSBs independent administrator.  
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be  
asked to submit statements.  
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:  
Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders  
relevant to the case.  
The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed  
on your vehicle ownership license.  
The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).  
The current mileage.  
The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.  
A brief description of your unresolved concern.  
A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor  
Company.  
The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the  
dealership(s).  
A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.  
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not  
qualify for Board review.  
Oral presentations  
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question  
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation  
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the  
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation  
may be requested by the Board as well.  
203  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
Making a decision  
Board members review all available information related to each  
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial  
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.  
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that  
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board  
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to  
consider some cases.  
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a  
form on which to accept or reject the Boards decision. The decisions of  
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but  
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to  
them under state or federal law.  
To request a DSB Brochure/Application  
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the  
Board at the following address/phone number:  
Dispute Settlement Board  
P.O. Box 5120  
Southfield, MI 480865120  
18004283718  
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center  
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952  
or by writing to the Center at the following address:  
Ford Motor Company  
Customer Relationship Center  
P.O. Box 6248  
Dearborn, Michigan 48121  
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM  
(CANADA ONLY)  
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and  
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been  
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party  
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor  
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).  
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy  
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a  
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is  
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal  
proceedings.  
204  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct  
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal  
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the  
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve  
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrators  
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.  
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more  
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial  
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.  
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA  
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the  
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you  
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.  
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock  
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or  
owner relations/customer relationship office.  
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may  
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause  
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of  
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper  
fuel.  
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty  
importing your vehicle back into the U.S.  
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in  
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the  
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:  
FORD MOTOR COMPANY  
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS  
1555 Fairlane Drive  
Fairlane Business Park #3  
Allen Park, Michigan 48101  
U.S.A.  
Telephone: (313) 594-4857  
FAX: (313) 390-0804  
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford  
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct  
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.  
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of  
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and  
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market  
Operations.  
205  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNERS LITERATURE  
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:  
HELM, INCORPORATED  
P.O. Box 07150  
Detroit, Michigan 48207  
Or call:  
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356  
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST  
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:  
www.helminc.com.  
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or  
money order.)  
Obtaining a French owners guide  
French Owners Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to  
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box  
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.  
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)  
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer  
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the  
vehicles applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of  
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the  
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and  
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or  
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer  
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund  
or replacement vehicle.  
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer  
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its  
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership  
of a new vehicle or the first 29,000 km (18,000 miles), whichever occurs  
first:  
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity  
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR  
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a  
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of  
the vehicle) OR  
206  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of  
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)  
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the  
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the  
following address:  
Ford Motor Company  
16800 Executive Plaza Drive  
Mail Drop 3NE-B  
Dearborn, MI 48126  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)  
If you believe that your vehicle has  
a defect which could cause a crash  
or could cause injury or death, you  
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and  
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a  
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved  
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor  
Company.  
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free  
at 18004249393 (or 3660123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write  
to:  
NHTSA  
400 Seventh Street  
U.S. Department of Transportation  
Washington, D.C. 20590  
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  
the Hotline.  
207  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
Cleaning  
WASHING THE EXTERIOR  
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral  
Ph shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3A), which is available  
from your dealer.  
Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing  
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted  
surfaces.  
Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touchor during exposure to  
strong, direct sunlight.  
Always use a clean sponge or carwash mitt with plenty of water for  
best results.  
Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to  
eliminate water spotting.  
It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the  
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause  
damage to the vehicle.  
Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings  
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicles  
paintwork and trim over time.  
Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a  
car wash.  
Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted  
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,  
wash off as soon as possible.  
If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use  
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running  
board surface, as the area may become slippery.  
WAXING  
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will  
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.  
Wash the vehicle first.  
Do not use waxes that contain abrasives.  
Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body  
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof  
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl  
area. The paint sealant will grayor stain the parts over time.  
208  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
PAINT CHIPS  
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicles color.  
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the drivers door jam) to  
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.  
Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar  
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.  
Always read the instructions before using the products.  
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS  
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint  
finish. In order to maintain their shine:  
Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37A),  
which is available from your dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust  
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly  
with a strong stream of water.  
Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or  
covers.  
Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your  
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning  
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust  
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.  
Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel  
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.  
To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover  
(ZC-42), available from your dealer.  
ENGINE  
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt  
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:  
Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The  
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause  
damage.  
Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the  
engine block or other engine components.  
Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts  
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.  
Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the  
running engine may cause internal damage.  
209  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning  
the engine.  
5.4L V8/6.8L V10 gasoline engines  
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS  
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are  
available from your dealer.  
For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3A).  
If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar  
Remover (ZC-42).  
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES  
The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned  
regularly. If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the  
windshield, rear window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These  
may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree  
sap, or other organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow  
these tips:  
The windshield or rear window may be cleaned with a non-abrasive  
cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23),  
available from your dealer.  
Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.  
Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.  
Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or  
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they  
appear worn or do not function properly.  
210  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS  
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth.  
Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of  
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the  
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.  
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning  
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of  
the air bag system.  
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in  
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan  
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted  
surfaces.  
INTERIOR TRIM  
Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping  
with a dry, soft, clean cloth.  
Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the  
finish.  
INTERIOR  
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:  
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.  
Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Extra Strength  
Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-41).  
If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first  
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).  
Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution.  
Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can  
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of  
the seat materials.  
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicles  
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.  
211  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH  
F250 AND F350 CREWCAB)  
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the  
leather.  
For King Ranch F-250 and F-350 CrewCab leather seats, refer to  
separate section in this chapter.  
To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl  
Cleaner (ZC-11A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.  
To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe  
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11D), available from your authorized dealer.  
Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or  
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based  
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of  
the clear, protective coating on the seat.  
LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH F-250 AND F-350  
CREWCAB ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain  
leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and  
maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.  
Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the  
leather. Failure to care for the leather can result in drying out and fading  
of the material.  
Cleaning  
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft  
brush.  
First use a damp cloth then wipe with a dry cloth. Allow the area to dry,  
then apply conditioner.  
Clean spills as quickly as possible.  
Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the  
leather as cleaners may darken the leather. For more specific cleaning  
information, contact the King Ranch Saddle Shop at 1800282KING  
(5464).  
Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based  
products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.  
Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or  
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.  
212  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
Scratches  
In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear  
marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same  
instructions as in the Conditioning section.  
Conditioning  
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King  
Ranch Saddle Shop. Visit the Web site at www.krsaddleshop.com, or  
telephone (in the United States) 1800282KING (5464). If you are  
unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another premium  
leather conditioner.  
Apply your first conditioning treatment within six months of taking  
delivery of your vehicle. Condition twice yearly in order to replenish  
lost oils and revitalize the aroma, suppleness and resilience of the  
leather.  
Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.  
Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of  
conditioner to a clean, dry cloth  
Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the  
conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior. If a  
film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.  
UNDERBODY  
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and  
door drain holes free from packed dirt.  
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS  
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available  
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products  
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they  
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your  
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or  
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products  
or products of equivalent quality:  
Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC8A)  
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (not available in Canada) (ZC-40A)  
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)  
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)  
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada)  
(ZC-11A)  
213  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)  
Motorcraft Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada)  
(ZC-41)  
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)  
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37A)  
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38A)  
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)  
Ford Premium Car Wash Concentrate (F2SZ-19523WC)  
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)  
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14)  
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3A)  
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)  
Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13)  
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada)  
(ZC-23)  
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20)  
214  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Maintenance and Specifications  
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS  
To help you service your vehicle:  
We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy  
location.  
We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking  
routine service easy.  
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide  
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner  
Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered.  
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts  
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to  
provide the best performance in your vehicle.  
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE  
Do not work on a hot engine.  
Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.  
Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed  
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.  
Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away  
from the battery and all fuel related parts.  
Working with the engine off  
Automatic transmission:  
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).  
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.  
3. Block the wheels.  
Manual transmission:  
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1  
(First).  
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.  
3. Block the wheels.  
Working with the engine on  
Automatic transmission:  
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).  
2. Block the wheels.  
215  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Manual transmission:  
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in N  
(Neutral).  
2. Block the wheels.  
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not  
remove it while the engine is running.  
OPENING THE HOOD  
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood  
release handle located under the  
bottom left corner of the instrument  
panel.  
HOOD  
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and  
release the auxiliary latch located  
under the right center of the hood.  
Slide the handle to release the  
auxiliary latch.  
3. Lift the hood until the lift  
cylinders hold it open.  
216  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
5.4L V8/6.8L V10 gasoline engines  
Refer to the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel  
Owners Guide Supplement for diesel engine component locations.  
1. Engine oil dipstick  
2. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)  
3. Brake fluid reservoir  
4. Power steering fluid reservoir  
5. Air filter assembly  
6. Engine coolant reservoir  
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
8. Battery  
9. Engine oil filler cap  
10. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)  
217  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID  
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the  
level is low. In very cold weather, do  
not fill the reservoir completely.  
Only use a washer fluid that meets  
Ford specification WSB-M8B16A2.  
Refer to Lubricant specifications  
in this chapter.  
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the  
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.  
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used  
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the  
vehicles paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.  
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 4.5° C (40°  
F), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use  
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in  
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.  
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer  
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system  
components.  
ENGINE OIL  
Checking the engine oil  
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals  
for checking the engine oil.  
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.  
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the  
oil pan.  
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P  
(Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission).  
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.  
218  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
5. Locate and carefully remove the  
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).  
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it  
again.  
If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is  
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.  
If the oil level is below the MIN  
mark, add enough oil to raise the  
level within the MIN-MAX range.  
Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil  
must be removed from the engine by a service technician.  
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.  
Adding engine oil  
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine  
oil in this chapter.  
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified  
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap  
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.  
219  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the  
MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).  
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.  
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise  
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.  
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the  
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.  
Engine oil and filter recommendations  
Look for this certification  
trademark.  
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.  
Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Enginesby the American  
Petroleum Institute (API). To protect your engines warranty use  
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford  
specification WSS-M2C153H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel  
economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for  
your vehicles engine.  
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine  
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that  
is not covered by Ford warranty.  
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in  
the scheduled maintenance guide.  
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for  
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used  
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up  
engine noises or knock may be experienced.  
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or  
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.  
220  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
BATTERY  
Your vehicle is equipped with a  
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery  
which normally does not require  
additional water during its life of  
service.  
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the  
battery electrolyte level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for  
the service interval schedules.  
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the level indicator.  
Do not overfill the battery cells.  
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water  
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high  
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery  
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the  
charging system checked.  
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled  
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.  
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and  
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to  
the battery terminals.  
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables  
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the  
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.  
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the  
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the  
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and  
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.  
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause  
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted  
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,  
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper  
ventilation.  
221  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the  
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,  
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.  
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite  
corners.  
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric  
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes  
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of  
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush  
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt  
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.  
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and  
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.  
For information on transmission operation after the battery has been  
disconnected see Shift strategyin the driving section.  
Because your vehicles engine is also electronically controlled by a  
computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the  
battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed,  
the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum  
driveability and performance. To begin this process:  
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.  
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral  
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the  
engine.  
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.  
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.  
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.  
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.  
The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to  
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.  
If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle  
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle  
trim is eventually relearned.  
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,  
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is  
reconnected.  
222  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Always dispose of automotive  
batteries in a responsible manner.  
Follow your local authorized  
standards for disposal. Call your  
local authorized recycling center  
to find out more about recycling  
automotive batteries.  
RECYCLE  
ENGINE COOLANT  
Checking engine coolant  
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the  
mileage intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. The coolant  
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,  
which equates to a freeze point of -36° C (-34° F). Coolant concentration  
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the  
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014R1060). The level of coolant  
should be maintained at the cold fullof cold fill rangelevel in the  
coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the instructions  
in the Adding engine coolant section.  
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water  
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above  
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A  
5050 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:  
Freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F).  
Boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F).  
Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.  
Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.  
223  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
When the engine is cold, check the  
level of the engine coolant in the  
reservoir.  
MAX  
MIN  
COLD FILL  
RANGE  
The engine coolant should be at the cold fill levelor within the cold  
fill rangeas listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon  
application).  
Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval  
schedules.  
Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your  
vehicle in this chapter.  
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,  
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is  
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding  
engine coolant in this chapter.  
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine  
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified  
function and vehicle location.  
Adding engine coolant  
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant  
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the  
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.  
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and  
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you  
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.  
224  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid  
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could  
make it difficult to see through the windshield.  
Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant  
(yellow-colored), VC-7A (VC-7B in Oregon), meeting Ford  
Specification WSS-M97B51A1.  
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may  
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from  
yellow to golden tan.  
Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such  
as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or  
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44D  
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange  
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your  
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.  
A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case  
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the  
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of  
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone  
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,  
overheating or freezing.  
Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants  
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol  
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or  
freezing.  
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These  
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine  
coolant.  
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap  
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery  
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and  
water to the cold fulllevel. For all other vehicles, which have a coolant  
degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the  
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow  
system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.  
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is  
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The  
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out  
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.  
225  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.  
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant  
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).  
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.  
3. Step back while the pressure releases.  
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the  
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.  
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see  
above), to within the cold fill rangeor the cold fulllevel on the  
reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the  
radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.  
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly  
installed to prevent coolant loss.)  
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer  
to Checking Engine Coolant section. If the concentration is not 50/50  
(protection to 34° F/36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the  
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50  
coolant concentration.  
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant  
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If  
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and  
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.  
If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per  
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling  
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant  
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.  
Recycled engine coolant  
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine  
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold  
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet  
available.  
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate  
manner. Follow your communitys regulations and standards for recycling  
and disposing of automotive fluids.  
Coolant refill capacity  
To find out how much fluid your vehicles cooling system can hold, refer  
to Refill capacities in this chapter.  
226  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant  
in this chapter.  
Severe climates  
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than 36° C [34° F]):  
It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration  
above 50%.  
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.  
Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will  
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the  
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate  
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the  
winter months.  
If you drive in extremely hot climates:  
It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration  
above 40%.  
NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.  
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will  
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will  
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the  
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate  
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.  
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50  
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system  
and engine protection.  
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)  
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to  
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.  
The fail-safedistance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load  
and terrain.  
227  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
How fail-safe cooling works  
If the engine begins to overheat:  
The engine coolant temperature  
gauge will move to the red (hot)  
area.  
The  
illuminate.  
and  
symbol will  
The Service Engine Soon  
indicator light will illuminate.  
If the engine reaches a preset  
over-temperature condition, the engine will automatically switch to  
alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air  
pump and cools the engine.  
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:  
The engine power will be limited.  
The air conditioning system will be disabled.  
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine  
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to  
increase.  
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take  
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine  
damage.  
When fail-safe mode is activated  
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the  
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed  
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is  
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine  
damage, therefore:  
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.  
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.  
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.  
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.  
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is  
running or hot.  
228  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.  
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem  
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a  
service facility as soon as possible.  
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS  
Important safety precautions  
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank  
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.  
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is  
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops  
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may  
spray out and injure you or others.  
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or  
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause  
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible  
personal injury.  
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or  
mishandled.  
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.  
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:  
Extinguish all smoking materials  
and any open flames before  
fueling your vehicle.  
Always turn off the vehicle before  
fueling.  
Automotive fuels can be harmful  
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if  
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,  
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately  
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.  
229  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind  
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,  
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious  
illness and permanent injury.  
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,  
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and  
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could  
lead to permanent injury.  
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is  
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated  
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or  
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.  
Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuseor other forms of  
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,  
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive  
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is  
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and  
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse  
reaction.  
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow  
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while  
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.  
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.  
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static  
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an  
ungrounded fuel container.  
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an  
ungrounded fuel container:  
Place approved fuel container on the ground.  
DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the  
cargo area).  
Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while  
filling.  
DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill  
position.  
230  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Fuel Filler Cap  
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off  
feature.  
When fueling your vehicle:  
1. Turn the engine off.  
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it  
stops.  
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.  
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the  
filler pipe.  
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops.  
If the Service Engine Soon/Check Engineindicator comes on and stays  
on after you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly  
installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap  
properly and reinstall it.  
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler  
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may  
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the  
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.  
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is  
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops  
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may  
spray out and injure you or others.  
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or  
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause  
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible  
personal injury.  
Choosing the right fuel  
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law  
and could damage your vehicle.  
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system  
components.  
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic  
compounds, including manganese-based additives.  
231  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was  
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.  
Octane recommendations  
Your vehicle is designed to use  
Regularunleaded gasoline with  
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.  
87  
We do not recommend the use of  
(R+M)/2 METHOD  
gasolines labeled as Regularthat  
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.  
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if  
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel  
with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified  
service technician to prevent any engine damage.  
Fuel quality  
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability  
problems during a cold start, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline.  
Premiumunleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed  
to use Regularunleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems  
to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or  
a qualified service technician.  
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel  
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane  
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.  
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your  
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.  
Many of the worlds automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter  
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved  
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.  
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when  
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the  
World-wide Fuel Charter.  
Cleaner air  
Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner-burninggasolines to  
improve air quality.  
Running out of fuel  
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse  
affect on powertrain components.  
232  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
If you have run out of fuel:  
You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after  
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to  
the engine.  
Your Service Engine Soonindicator may come on. For more  
information on the Service Engine Soonindicator, refer to the  
Instrument cluster chapter.  
Fuel Filter  
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service  
technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate  
intervals for changing the fuel filter.  
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The  
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system  
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.  
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY  
Measuring techniques  
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the  
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as  
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are  
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking  
fuel economy measurements during the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles) of  
driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate  
measurement after 3,000 km5,000 km (2,000 miles-3,000 miles).  
Filling the tank  
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to  
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities  
section of this chapter.  
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the  
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the  
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates  
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel  
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.  
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should  
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your  
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be  
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the  
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.  
233  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:  
Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,  
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.  
Use the same filling rate setting (low medium high) each time  
the tank is filled.  
Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling.  
Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.  
Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.  
Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the  
same direction each time you fill up.  
Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.  
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.  
Calculating fuel economy  
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading  
(in kilometers or miles).  
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters  
or gallons).  
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record  
the current odometer reading.  
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer  
reading.  
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel  
economy:  
Calculation 1: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total  
kilometers traveled.  
Calculation 2: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.  
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city  
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicles fuel  
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records  
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel  
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.  
Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits  
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change  
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.  
234  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Habits  
Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.  
Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel  
economy.  
Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste  
fuel.  
Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.  
Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.  
Slow down gradually.  
Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15%  
less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]).  
Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.  
Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.  
You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if  
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.  
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel  
economy.  
Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may  
reduce fuel economy.  
Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel  
economy.  
Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.  
Maintenance  
Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.  
Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel  
economy.  
Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in  
this chapter.  
Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the  
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks  
found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide.  
Conditions  
Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy  
at any speed.  
Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately  
0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried).  
235  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug  
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may  
reduce fuel economy.  
Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.  
Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first  
1216 km (810 miles) of driving.  
Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to  
driving on hilly terrain.  
Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top  
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.  
Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than  
two-wheel-drive operation.  
Close windows for high speed driving.  
EPA window sticker  
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your  
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA  
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons  
with other vehicles.  
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window  
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG)  
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy  
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.  
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM  
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a  
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with  
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic  
converter and other emission control components continue to work  
properly:  
Use only the specified fuel listed.  
Avoid running out of fuel.  
Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at  
high speeds.  
Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance guide performed  
according to the specified schedule.  
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance  
guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its  
emissions system.  
236  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for  
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting  
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine  
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.  
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry  
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine  
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.  
Illumination of the Service Engine Soonlight, charging system warning  
light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke  
or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system  
is not working properly.  
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially  
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.  
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By  
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,  
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not  
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent  
it from working. Information about your vehicles emission system is on  
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the  
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up  
specifications.  
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty  
information.  
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)  
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engines  
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On  
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the  
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet  
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists the  
service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Check  
Engine/Service Engine Soon light illuminates, the OBD-II system has  
detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check  
Engine/Service Engine Soon light to illuminate. Examples are:  
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run  
poorly.)  
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.  
237  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened.  
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank  
with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three  
driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions  
present, the Check Engine/Service Engine Soon light should turn off.  
(A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed  
city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required.  
If the Check Engine/Service Engine Soon light remains on, have your  
vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity.  
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing  
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of  
the on-board diagnostics system. If your Check Engine/Service Engine  
Soonlight is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and  
chimes section of the Instrument cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not  
pass the I/M test with the Check Engine/Service Engine Soonlight on.  
If the vehicles powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,  
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a not ready for I/M test”  
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a  
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as  
described below:  
First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.  
Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with  
at least four idle periods.  
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the  
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The  
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,  
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.  
238  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID  
Check the power steering fluid.  
Refer to the scheduled maintenance  
guide for the service interval  
schedules. If adding fluid is  
necessary, use only MERCONATF.  
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20° – 80° F (-7°  
25° C):  
1. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be between the arrows  
in the FULL COLD range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this  
range.  
2. If the fluid level is low, start the engine.  
3. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several  
times.  
4. Turn the engine off.  
5. Recheck the fluid level on the dipstick. Do not add fluid if the level is  
between the arrows in the FULL COLD range.  
6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking  
the level until it reaches the FULL COLD range. Be sure to put the  
dipstick back in the reservoir.  
BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR  
The fluid level will drop slowly as  
the brakes wear, and will rise when  
the brake components are replaced.  
Fluid levels below the MAXline  
that do not trigger the brake system  
warning lamp are within the normal  
operating range, there is no need to  
add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range,  
the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek  
service from your dealer immediately.  
239  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)  
Check the clutch fluid level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide  
for the service interval schedules.  
Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Ford specification  
ESA-M6C25A. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter.  
Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes  
with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if  
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting.  
Seek medical attention immediately.  
During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should  
remain constant or rise slightly. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid  
level to the step in the reservoir.  
1. Clean the reservoir cap before  
removal to prevent dirt and water  
from entering the reservoir.  
2. Remove cap and rubber  
diaphragm from reservoir.  
3. Add fluid until the level reaches  
the step in the reservoir.  
4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and  
cap onto reservoir.  
240  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
TRANSMISSION FLUID  
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)  
Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled intervals for  
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid.  
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not  
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you  
notice some sign of fluid leakage.  
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an  
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating  
temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been  
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot  
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30  
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.  
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating  
temperature.  
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.  
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,  
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear  
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.  
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.  
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If  
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment  
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.  
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.  
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in  
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient  
temperature.  
Low fluid level  
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid  
level is at the bottom of the dipstick  
ADD  
COLD  
HOT  
DO NOT ADD  
and the ambient temperature is  
above 10°C (50°F).  
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK  
241  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Correct fluid level  
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating  
temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal  
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20  
miles) of driving.  
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is  
above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill  
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating  
temperature.  
The transmission fluid should be in  
this range if at normal operating  
temperature (66°C-77°C  
[150°F-170°F]).  
ADD  
COLD  
HOT  
DO NOT ADD  
The transmission fluid should be in  
this range if at ambient temperature  
(10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]).  
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA  
CHECK WHEN HOT  
IDLING IN PARK  
IDLING IN PARK  
IDLING IN PARK  
High fluid level  
ADD  
COLD  
HOT  
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA  
HOT  
DO NOT ADD  
Fluid levels above the safe range  
may result in transmission failure.  
An overfill condition of transmission  
fluid may cause shift and/or  
engagement concerns and/or  
possible damage.  
CHECK WHEN HOT  
ADD  
COLD  
DO NOT ADD  
High fluid levels can be caused by  
an overheating condition.  
Adjusting automatic  
transmission fluid levels  
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA CHECK WHEN HOT  
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of  
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the  
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter.  
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause  
internal transmission component damage.  
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler  
tube until the level is correct.  
242  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid  
should be removed by a qualified  
technician.  
ADD  
COLD  
HOT  
DO NOT ADD  
An overfill condition of  
transmission fluid may cause  
shift and/or engagement  
concerns and/or possible  
damage.  
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA  
CHECK WHEN HOT  
IDLING IN PARK  
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or  
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission  
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.  
Automatic transmission fluid filter (if equipped)  
The TorqShift automatic  
transmission is equipped with a  
serviceable external fluid filter  
mounted on the frame rail. Refer to  
the Scheduled Maintenance Guide  
for service intervals.  
To replace the transmission filter:  
1. Shut off the engine.  
2. Unscrew filter housing.  
3. Replace filter with a new authorized Motorcraft filter element. Refer to  
the Motorcraft Part Numbers chart in this chapter.  
4. Reinstall housing and check transmission fluid level using procedure in  
this section.  
243  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)  
1. Clean the filler plug.  
2. Remove the filler plug and  
inspect the fluid level.  
3. Fluid level should be at the  
bottom of the opening.  
4. Add enough fluid through the  
filler opening so that the fluid level  
is at the bottom of the opening.  
5. Install and tighten the fill plug  
securely.  
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant  
Specifications in this chapter.  
244  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Checking and adding transfer case fluid (if equipped)  
1. Clean the filler plug.  
2. Remove the filler plug and  
inspect the fluid level.  
3. Add only enough fluid through  
the filler opening so that the fluid  
level is at the bottom of the  
opening.  
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant  
Specifications in this chapter.  
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE  
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require  
lubrication. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for maintenance  
intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints  
equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary.  
245  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE  
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals  
for changing the air filter element.  
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter  
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft Part Numbers.  
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not  
remove it while the engine is running.  
Changing the air filter element  
1. Loosen the clamp that secures  
the air filter element in place.  
2. Carefully separate the two halves  
of the air filter housing.  
3. Remove the air filter element  
from the open end of the air filter  
housing.  
4. Install a new air filter element, ensuring the arrow on the top half of  
the air filter housing lines up with the notch on the bottom half of air  
filter housing. Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between  
the air filter housing. This could cause filter damage and allow  
unmetered air to enter the engine if not properly seated.  
5. Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp.  
246  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING  
New vehicles are fitted with tires  
that have a rating on them called  
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality  
grades can be found where  
applicable on the tire sidewall  
between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For  
example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United  
States Department of Transportation has set.  
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger  
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,  
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim  
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in  
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).  
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.  
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following  
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.  
Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of  
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified  
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one  
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual  
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the  
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
Traction AA A B C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The  
grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured  
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of  
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction  
performance.  
247  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on  
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include  
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.  
Temperature A B C  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the  
tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to  
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by  
law.  
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that  
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,  
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in  
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.  
SERVICING YOUR TIRES  
Checking the tire pressure  
Use an accurate tire pressure gauge.  
Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been  
parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 5 km (3 miles).  
Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the  
Certification Label. Tire pressure information can also be found on the  
Tire Information label located on the inside of the fuel filler door.  
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail  
suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control, vehicle  
rollover and/or personal injury.  
248  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Tire inflation information  
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped):  
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they  
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including  
adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,  
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and  
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. For example, during any  
procedure involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must  
utilize a remote inflation device, and insure that all persons are clear of  
the trajectory area.  
WARNING An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if  
improperly used, serviced or maintained. To avoid serious injury,  
never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat or seriously  
under-inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel assembly  
for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or replace tires or  
wheels without first taking precautions to protect persons and  
property.  
Tire rotation  
Because your vehicles tires perform different jobs, they often wear  
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate  
them as indicated in the scheduled maintenance guide. If you notice that  
the tires wear unevenly, have them checked.  
The following procedure applies to vehicles equipped with single rear  
wheel.  
249  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Four tire rotation  
Five tire rotation  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a  
temporary or a conventional spare  
tire. If the spare tire is different in  
size (diameter and/or width), tread  
type (All-season or All-Terrain) or is  
from a different manufacturer other  
than the road tires on your vehicle,  
your spare tire is considered  
temporary.  
If road tire replacement is  
necessary, replace it with a tire of  
the same size, tread, speed rating  
and load carrying capacity as soon  
as possible. Temporary spare tires  
should not be used in a five-tire rotation.  
250  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
DRW Six tire rotation  
If your vehicle is equipped with dual  
rear wheels it is recommended that  
front and rear tires (in pairs) be  
rotated only side to side, with the  
rear tires maintaining original  
vehicle position. After tire rotation,  
inflation pressures must be adjusted  
for the tires new positions in  
accordance with vehicle  
requirements.  
Replacing the tires  
Replace the tires when the wear  
band is visible through the tire  
treads. Due to exposure to the  
elements and exhaust you should  
replace the spare tire when you  
replace the other tires.  
When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or  
bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the  
Certification Label. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed  
rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations  
recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions,  
your vehicle handling may be affected which can lead to loss of vehicle  
control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury.  
251  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type,  
speed rating, load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., All  
Terrain, Touring, etc.), as originally offered by Ford.  
Do not replace your tires with high performancetires or larger  
size tires.  
Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the  
handling of the vehicle, and increase the risk of loss of vehicle  
control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury.  
Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicles original tires may also  
affect the accuracy of your speedometer.  
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS  
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you  
currently have on your vehicle.  
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in  
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow  
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel  
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip  
aluminum wheels.  
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:  
Use only SAE Class S chains.  
Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any  
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.  
Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your  
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove  
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.  
If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.  
Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use  
tire chains on dry roads.  
The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle  
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when  
using snow tires and chains.  
252  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS  
Component*  
Air filter element  
Fuel filter  
Oil filter  
PCV valve  
5.4L V8 engine  
FA-1634  
FG-986B  
FL-820-S  
EV-233  
6.8L V10 engine  
FA-1634  
FG-986B  
FL-820-S  
EV-233  
Battery (Standard)  
Battery (Optional)  
Spark plugs-platinum**  
Automatic Transmission  
Filter ***  
BXT-65-650  
BXT-65-750  
AGSF-22W  
BXT-65-650  
BXT-65-750  
AGSF-22W  
*Refer to the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel  
Owners Guide Supplement for Motorcraft diesel engine service part  
numbers.  
**Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark  
plug gap information.  
***Only available with 6.0L Diesel engine/TorqShift transmission. Part  
number is FT-145.  
253  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
REFILL CAPACITIES  
Fluid  
Ford Part Name  
Application  
Capacity  
Front axle  
Hypoid Gear Oil  
SAE 90  
F-250/350  
(Dana 60 axle)  
2.7L (5.8 pints)  
F-350/450/550  
(Dana 60 axle)  
F-250 /350  
2.7L (5.8 pints)  
3.3L (6.9 pints)  
1,2  
Rear axle  
Motorcraft SAE  
75W-140 Synthetic (10.50 inch  
Rear Axle  
Lubricant  
axle)  
Motorcraft SAE  
F-350/450  
4.0L (8.5 pints)  
75W-90 Synthetic (DANA 80)  
Rear Axle  
Lubricant  
Motorcraft SAE  
80W-90 Premium  
Rear Axle  
F-550  
(Dana 135)  
11.6L (24.5  
pints)  
Lubricant  
Brake fluid  
(and clutch  
fluid-if  
Motorcraft High  
Performance DOT  
3 Motor Vehicle  
Brake Fluid  
All  
Fill to line or  
step (for  
clutch) on  
reservoir  
equipped)  
Engine coolant Motorcraft  
5.4L V8 engine 25.0L (26.4  
with A/C quarts)  
6.8L V10 engine 26.0L (27.5  
quarts)  
3
Premium Gold  
Engine Coolant  
(yellow-colored)  
Engine oil  
Motorcraft SAE  
5.4L V8 and  
6.8L V10  
engines  
5.7L (6.0  
quarts)  
(includes filter 5W-20 Premium  
change)-Gas  
Synthetic Blend  
Motor Oil (US)  
Motorcraft SAE  
5W-20 Super  
Premium Motor Oil  
(Canada)  
engines7  
Engine oil  
Refer to your 6.0L Diesel Supplement  
(includes filter  
change)-Diesel  
engine  
254  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Fluid  
Fuel tank  
Ford Part Name  
N/A  
Application  
Capacity  
71.9L (19.0  
gallons)  
Mid-ship tank  
(optional on  
Chassis Cab)  
Right side  
87.1L (23.0  
saddle mounted gallons)  
tank (optional  
on Chassis Cab)  
Short box  
Long box  
Aft axle  
All  
109.8L (29.0  
gallons)  
143.9L (38.0  
gallons)  
151.4L (40.0  
gallons)  
Fill to FULL  
COLD range on  
dipstick  
Power steering Motorcraft  
fluid  
MERCONATF  
Transfer case  
fluid  
Motorcraft  
MERCONATF  
4x4 vehicles  
1.9L (2.0  
quarts)  
Manual  
transmission  
fluid  
Motorcraft  
MERCONATF  
6-speed manual 5.5L (5.8  
5
quarts)  
Automatic  
Motorcraft  
4R100  
16.7L (17.7  
quarts)6  
transmission  
MERCONATF  
(4speed)  
4
fluid  
Motorcraft  
MERCONSP ATF (5speed)  
TorqShift  
16.6L (17.5  
quarts)  
6(includes  
remote filter  
element  
change)  
Windshield  
washer fluid  
Motorcraft  
All  
4.0L (4.25  
quarts)  
Premium  
Windshield Washer  
Concentrate  
255  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
1Your vehicles rear axle(s) may be filled with a synthetic lubricant that  
may require a lubricant change. Refer to the scheduled maintenance  
guide. Axle lubricant quantities should not need to be checked unless a  
leak is suspected, service is required or the axle assembly has been  
submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time the  
rear axle has been submerged in water.  
2Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3or equivalent  
meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of  
Traction-Lok axles.  
3Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.  
4Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission  
fluid requirements are indicated on the end of the dipstick. Check the  
container to verify the fluid being added is of the correct type. Refer to  
your scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service  
interval.  
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as  
MERCONand MERCONV. These dual usage fluids are not to be used  
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCONtype  
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that  
require the MERCONV type fluid.  
MERCON, MERCONV and MERCONSP are not  
interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON, MERCONV and  
MERCONSP. Use of dual usage fluids in an automatic  
transmission application requiring MERCONSP may cause  
transmission damage. Use of a transmission fluid other than the  
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.  
5Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the  
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. The 6speed  
manual transmission is equipped with an in-tank cooler. Verify the fluid  
level after operating vehicle to assure correct fluid level.  
6Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary  
based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount  
of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on  
the dipsticks normal operating range.  
7Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine  
oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification  
WSS-M2C153H and the API Certification mark.  
256  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS  
Ford part  
name or  
equivalent  
High  
Ford part  
number  
Ford  
specification  
Item  
E8TZ-19590A  
ESA-M1C198A  
Temperature  
Spindle bearing 4X4 Front Axle  
and Wheel  
Bearing Grease  
Front axle  
(4X4)  
Hypoid Gear Oil C6AZ-19580E  
SAE 90  
ESW-M2C105A  
Motorcraft SAE XY-75W140QL WSL-M2C192-A  
75W-140 High  
Performance  
Synthetic Rear  
1
Axle Lube  
Motorcraft SAE XY-75W90GLS  
75W-90  
Rear axle  
Synthetic Rear  
Axle Lubricant  
Motorcraft SAE XY-80W90-QL  
80W-90  
WSP-M2C197-A  
Premium Rear  
Axle Lubricant  
(Dana 135  
1
axles)  
Motorcraft High PM-1  
Brake fluid and Performance  
ESA-M6C25-A  
and DOT 3  
clutch fluid (if  
equipped)  
DOT 3 Motor  
Vehicle Brake  
Fluid  
Engine coolant  
Motorcraft  
VC-7A  
WSS-M97B51-A1  
Premium Gold  
Engine Coolant  
(yellow-colored)  
257  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Ford part  
Ford part  
Ford  
specification  
Item  
name or  
number  
equivalent  
Motorcraft SAE XO-5W20-QSP  
5W-20 Premium (US)  
WSS-M2C153-H  
and API  
Synthetic Blend CXO-5W20LSP12 Certification  
Motor Oil (US) (Canada)  
Motorcraft SAE  
5W-20 Super  
Mark  
Engine oil  
Premium Motor  
Oil (Canada)  
Hinges, latches, Multi-Purpose  
XG4 or XL-5  
ESR-M1C159-A  
or  
ESB-M1C93B  
striker plates,  
fuel filler door  
hinge and seat  
tracks  
Grease  
Motorcraft  
XL-1  
none  
Lock cylinders  
penetrating and  
lock lubricant  
Motorcraft  
Transmission  
XG-1-C or  
XG-1-K  
ESA-M1C75-B  
/steering/parking Premium  
brake linkages  
Long-Life Grease  
and pivots,  
brake and clutch  
pedal shaft (if  
equipped)  
Power steering Motorcraft  
XT-2-QDX  
XT-2-QDX  
MERCON௡  
MERCON௡  
fluid and  
MERCONATF  
transfer case  
fluid (if  
equipped)  
Manual  
Motorcraft  
transmission  
(6-speed)  
MERCONATF  
2
258  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Ford part  
name or  
equivalent  
Ford part  
number  
Ford  
specification  
Item  
Automatic  
transmission  
4R100  
(4speed)  
Automatic  
transmission  
TorqShift  
(5speed)  
Motorcraft  
XT-2-QDX  
XT-6QSP  
ZC-32A  
MERCON௡  
MERCONATF  
2
Motorcraft  
MERCONSP  
WSB-M8B16A2  
MERCONSP  
2
ATF  
Motorcraft  
Premium  
Windshield  
Washer  
Windshield  
washer fluid  
Concentrate  
1Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent  
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of  
Traction-Lok axles. Ford design rear axles contain a synthetic lubricant  
that does not require changing unless the axle has been submerged in  
water. Dana rear axles also contain a synthetic lubricant but do require a  
change. Refer to your Service Guidefor change intervals on Dana rear  
axles.  
2Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission  
fluid requirements are indicated on the end of the dipstick. Check the  
container to verify the fluid being added is of the correct type. Refer to  
your scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service  
interval.  
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as  
MERCONand MERCONV. These dual usage fluids are not to be used  
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCONtype  
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that  
require the MERCONV type fluid.  
MERCON, MERCONV and MERCONSP are not  
interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON, MERCONV and  
MERCONSP. Use of dual usage fluids in an automatic  
transmission application requiring MERCONSP may cause  
transmission damage. Use of a transmission fluid other than the  
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.  
259  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
ENGINE DATA  
Engine*  
5.4L V8 engine  
330  
87 octane  
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8  
1.3-1.4 mm  
(0.052-0.056 inch)  
Coil on plug  
9.0:1  
6.8L V10 engine  
415  
87 octane  
1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9  
1.3-1.4 mm  
(0.052-0.056 inch)  
Coil on plug  
9.0:1  
Cubic inches  
Required fuel  
Firing order  
Spark plug gap  
Ignition system  
Compression ratio  
*Refer to the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel  
Owners Guide Supplement for Motorcraft diesel engine service part  
numbers.  
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS  
F250Regular and Super Cab  
Dimension  
Body style  
Regular Super Cab Super Cab  
Regular  
Cab 4x2  
1935 mm  
(76.2 in)  
1736 mm  
Cab 4x4  
2005 mm  
(78.9 in)  
1736 mm  
4x2  
4x4  
(1) Overall  
height  
(2) Track  
(Front /  
Rear)  
1943 mm  
(76.5 in)b  
1736 mm  
(68.3 in) /  
1729.3 mm  
(68 in)  
2008 mm  
(79.0 in)b  
1736 mm  
(68.3 in) /  
1729.3 mm  
(68 in)  
(68.3 in) / (68.3 in) /  
1729 mm  
(68 in)  
1729.3 mm  
(68 in)  
(3) Overall  
width  
(4)  
2031 mm  
(79.9 in)  
3479.8 mm 3479.8 mm  
(137 in) (137 in)  
2031 mm  
(79.9 in)  
2031 mm  
(79.9 in)  
3610.7 mm  
(141.8 in)a  
4013.2 mm  
(158 in)b  
2031 mm  
(79.9 in)  
3610.7 mm  
(141.8 in)a  
4013.2 mm  
(158 in)b  
Wheelbase  
260  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Dimension  
Body style  
Regular  
Cab 4x2  
5756 mm  
(226.6 in)  
Regular  
Cab 4x4  
5756 mm  
(226.6 in)  
Super Cab Super Cab  
4x2  
4x4  
(5) Overall  
length  
5878 mm  
(231.4 in)a  
6289 mm  
(247.6 in)b  
5878 mm  
(231.4 in)a  
6289 mm  
(247.6 in)b  
aShort Wheel Base (SWB)  
bLong wheel base (LWB)  
F250-Crew Cab  
Dimension  
Body style  
Crew Cab Crew Cab Crew Cab  
4x2/ Short 4x4/ Short 4x2/ Long  
Crew Cab  
4x4/ Long  
box  
box  
1960 mm  
(77.2 in)  
1736 mm  
box  
2027 mm  
(79.8 in)  
1736 mm  
box  
(1) Overall  
height  
(2) Track  
(Front /  
Rear)  
1957 mm  
(77.0 in)  
1736 mm  
(68.3 in) /  
1729 mm  
(68.1 in)  
2031 mm  
(79.9 in)  
4379 mm  
(172.4 in)  
6654 mm  
(262 in)  
2022 mm  
(76.6 in)  
1736 mm  
(68.3 in) /  
1729 mm  
(68.1 in)  
2031 mm  
(79.9 in)  
4379 mm  
(172.4 in)  
6654 mm  
(262 in)  
(68.3 in) / (68.3 in) /  
1729 mm  
(68.1 in)  
2031 mm  
(79.9 in)  
3967 mm  
(156.2 in)  
6243 mm  
(245.8 in)  
1729 mm  
(68.1 in)  
2031 mm  
(79.9 in)  
3967 mm  
(156.2 in)  
6243 mm  
(245.8 in)  
(3) Overall  
width  
(4)  
Wheelbase  
(5) Overall  
length  
261  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
F350except Crew Cab  
Dimension  
Body style  
Regular  
Cab Style  
Chassis  
Cab —  
Chassis  
Cab —  
Super Cab  
Style Side  
Regular  
Cab  
Super Cab Side  
(1) Overall  
height  
1924 mm  
(75.7 in)a  
1912 mm  
(75.2 in)b  
2028 mm  
(79.8 in)c  
2031 mm  
(80.0 in)d  
1928 mm  
(75.9 in)a  
1931 mm  
(76.0 in)b  
2029 mm  
(79.9 in)c  
2019 mm  
(79.5 in)d  
1938 mm  
1952 mm  
(76.8 in)a,e  
1954 mm  
(76.9 in)a,f  
1939 mm  
(76.3 in)b  
2051 mm  
(80.7 in)c,e  
2039 mm  
(80.3 in)c,f  
2019 mm  
(79.5 in)d  
1736 mm  
(68.3 in)a,b  
1736 mm  
(68.4 in)c,d  
1729 mm  
(68.1 in)a,c  
1880 mm  
(74.0 in)b,d  
2031 mm  
(79.9 in)a,c  
2426 mm  
(95.5)b,d  
(76.3 in)a  
1976 mm  
(77.8 in)b  
2041 mm  
(80.3 in)c  
2018 mm  
(79.4in)d  
(2a) Front  
Track  
1736 mm  
(68.3 in)a,b  
1736 mm  
(68.4 in)c,d  
1729 mm  
(68.1 in)a,c  
1880 mm  
(74.0 in)b,d  
2031 mm  
(79.9 in)a,c  
2304 mm  
(90.7 in)b  
2329 mm  
(91.7 in)d  
1736 mm  
(68.3 in)a,b  
1736 mm  
(68.4 in)c,d  
1729 mm  
(68.1 in)a,c  
1880 mm  
(74.0 in)b,d  
2031 mm  
(79.9 in)  
1736 mm  
(68.3 in)a,b  
1736 mm  
(68.4 in)c,d  
1729 mm  
(68.1 in)a,c  
1880 mm  
(74.0 in)b,d  
2031 mm  
(79.9 in)a,c  
2426 mm  
(95.5)b,d  
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
(2b) Rear  
Track  
(3) Overall  
width  
262  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Dimension  
Body style  
Chassis  
Cab —  
Chassis  
Cab —  
Regular  
Cab Style  
Super Cab  
Style Side  
Regular  
Cab  
Super Cab Side  
(4)  
Wheelbase  
3576 mm  
(140.8 in)  
4186 mm  
(164.8 in)  
5733 mm  
(225.7  
4110 mm  
(161.8 in)  
3480 mm  
(137.0 in)  
3602 mm  
(141.8 in)e/  
4014 mm  
(158.0 in)f  
5878 mm  
(231.4 in)e/  
6289 mm  
(247.6 in)f  
(5) Overall  
length  
6267 mm  
(246.7 in)  
5756 mm  
(226.6 in)  
in)a,b,c,d  
/
6343 (249.7  
in)b,d  
a4x2 Single rear wheel (SRW)  
b4x2 Dual rear wheel (DRW)  
c4x4 Single rear wheel (SRW)  
d4x4 Dual rear wheel (DRW)  
eShort box  
fLong box  
F350-Crew Cab  
Body style  
Crew chassis Crew cab-short Crew cab —  
Dimension  
Cab  
1 929 mm  
(75.9 in)a/  
1 941 mm  
(76.4 in)b/  
2 026 mm  
(79.8 in)c/  
2 038 mm  
(80.2 in)d  
1 736 mm  
(68.3 in)  
box  
long box  
1 964 mm  
(77.3 in)a/  
1991 mm  
(75.2 in)b/  
1 957 mm  
(77.0 in)c/  
2 031 mm  
(80.0 in)d  
1 736 mm  
(68.3 in)  
(1) Overall  
height  
1 955mm  
(77.0 in)a/  
1998 mm  
(78.6 in)b/  
1 958 mm  
(77.1 in)c/  
2 033 mm  
(80.0 in)d  
1 736 mm  
(68.3 in)  
(2a) Track  
Front  
263  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Body style  
Crew chassis Crew cab-short Crew cab —  
Dimension  
Cab  
1 729 mm  
(68.1 in)a,c  
1 803 mm  
box  
long box  
1 729 mm  
(68.1 in)a,c  
1 880 mm  
(2b) Track —  
Rear  
1 729 mm  
(68.1 in)a,c  
1 880 mm  
/
/
/
(74.0 in)b,d  
2 031 mm  
(74.0 in)b,d  
2 031 mm  
(79.9 in)a,c  
2 426 mm  
(95.5 in)b,d  
(74.0 in)b,d  
2 031 mm  
(79.9 in)a,c  
2 426 mm  
(95.5 in)b,d  
(3) Overall  
width  
(79.9 in)a,c  
2 304 mm  
(90.7 in)b/  
2 329 mm  
(91.7 in)d  
4 475 mm  
(176.2 in )  
6 632 mm  
(261.1 in)  
/
(4) Wheelbase  
3 967 mm  
(156.2 in )  
6 243 mm  
(245.8 in)  
4 379 mm  
(172.4 in)  
6 654 mm  
(262.0 in)  
(5) Overall  
length  
a4x2 Single rear wheel (SRW)  
b4x2 Dual rear wheel (DRW)  
c4x4 Single rear wheel (SRW)  
d4x4 Dual rear wheel (DRW)  
F450  
Dimension  
Body style  
Regular  
Cab  
Regular  
Cab  
Super Cab Crew Cab  
Chassis  
Chassis  
4x2/4x4  
2 053 mm  
(80.8 in) -  
4x2  
Chassis 4x2 Chassis 4x4 4x2/4x4  
(1) Overall  
height  
2 048 mm  
(80.6 in)a  
2 044 mm  
2 051 mm  
(80.7 in)a  
2 044 mm  
2 045 mm  
(80.5 in)  
b,c  
b
(80.5 in)  
2 038 mm  
(80.2 in)d  
(80.5 in)  
2 056 mm  
(80.9 in) -  
4x4  
2 033 mm  
(80.0 in)c,d  
264  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Dimension  
Body style  
Regular  
Cab  
Regular  
Cab  
Super Cab Crew Cab  
Chassis  
Chassis  
4x2/4x4  
1 736 mm  
(68.4 in) /  
1 880 mm  
(74.0 in)  
2 377 mm  
(93.6 in)  
4 475 mm  
(176.2 in)  
5 085 (200.2  
in)  
Chassis 4x2 Chassis 4x4 4x2/4x4  
(2) Track  
(Front /  
Rear)  
1 736 mm  
(68.4 in) /  
1 880 mm  
(74.0 in)  
2 377 mm  
(93.6 in)  
1 736 mm  
(68.4 in) /  
1880 mm  
(74.0 in)  
2 377 mm  
(93.6 in)  
1 736 mm  
(68.4 in) /  
1 889 mm  
(74.3 in)  
2 386 mm  
(93.9 in)  
(3) Overall  
width  
(4)  
3 576 mm  
(140.8 in)  
4 186 mm  
(164.8 in)  
4 795 mm  
(188.8 in)  
5 100 mm  
(200.8 in)  
5 733 mm  
(225.7 in)a  
6 343 mm  
(249.7 in)b  
6 952 mm  
(273.7 in)c  
7 257 mm  
(285.7 in)d  
3 576 mm  
(140.8 in)  
4 186 mm  
(164.8 in)  
4 795 mm  
(188.8 in)  
5 100 mm  
(200.8 in)  
5 733 mm  
(225.7 in)a  
6 343 mm  
(249.7 in)b  
6 952 mm  
(273.7 in)c  
7 257 mm  
(285.7 in)d  
4 110 mm  
(161.8 in)  
Wheelbase  
(5) Overall  
length  
6 267 mm  
6 632 mm  
(246.7 in) (261.1 in)e  
7 241 mm  
(285.1 in)f  
a
3 576 mm (140.8 in) wheel base  
b4 186 mm (164.8 in) wheel base  
c4 795 mm (188.8) wheel base  
d5 100 mm (200.8 in) wheel base  
e4 475 mm (176.2 in) wheel base  
f5 085 mm (200.2 in) wheel base  
265  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
F550  
Dimension  
Body style  
Crew Cab  
Regular  
Cab  
Regular  
Cab  
Crew Cab  
Chassis  
Cab 4x4  
Chassis  
Cab 4x2  
Chassis  
Cab 4x2  
2 076 mm  
(81.7 in)a  
2 068 mm  
Chassis  
Cab 4x4  
2 075 mm  
(81.7 in)a  
2 063 mm  
(1) Overall  
height  
2 067 mm  
(81.4 in)  
2 066 mm  
(81.3 in)  
b,c  
b
(81.4 in)  
(81.2 in)  
2 059 mm  
2 059 mm  
(81.1 in)c  
2 049 mm  
(80.7 in)d  
1 736 mm  
(68.4 in) /  
1880 mm  
(74.0 in)  
(81.1 in)d  
(2) Track  
(Front /  
Rear)  
1 736 mm  
(68.4 in) /  
1 880 mm  
(74.0 in)  
1 736 mm  
(68.4 in) /  
1 880 mm  
(74.0 in)  
1 736 mm  
(68.4 in) /  
1 880 mm  
(74.0 in)  
(3) Overall  
width  
2 377 mm  
(93.6 in)  
2 377 mm  
(93.6 in)  
2 377 mm  
(93.6 in)  
2 377 mm  
(93.6 in)  
(4)  
Wheelbase  
3 576 mm  
(140.8 in)  
4 186 mm  
(164.8 in)  
4 795 mm  
(188.8 in)  
5 100 mm  
(200.8 in)  
3 576 mm  
(140.8 in)  
4 186 mm  
(164.8 in)  
4 795 mm  
(188.8 in)  
5 100 mm  
(200.8 in)  
4 475 mm  
(176.2 in)  
5 085 (200.2 5 085 (200.2  
in) in)  
4 475 mm  
(176.2 in)  
266  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Dimension  
Body style  
Regular  
Cab  
Regular  
Cab  
Crew Cab  
Chassis  
Crew Cab  
Chassis  
Chassis  
Chassis  
Cab 4x2  
Cab 4x4  
Cab 4x2  
5 733 mm  
(225.7 in)a  
6 343 mm  
(249.7 in)b  
6 952 mm  
(273.7 in)c  
7 257 mm  
(285.7 in)d  
Cab 4x4  
5 733 mm  
(225.7 in)a  
6 343 mm  
(249.7 in)b  
6 952 mm  
(273.7 in)c  
7 257 mm  
(285.7 in)d  
(5) Overall  
length  
6 632 mm  
(261.1 in)e  
7 241 mm  
(285.1 in)f  
6 632 mm  
(261.1 in)e  
7 241 mm  
(285.1 in)f  
a
3 576 mm (140.8 in) wheel base  
b4 186 mm (164.8 in) wheel base  
c4 795 mm (188.8) wheel base  
d5 100 mm (200.8 in) wheel base  
e4 475 mm (176.2 in) wheel base  
f5 085 mm (200.2 in) wheel base  
1
2
3
267  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
4
5
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE  
Certification label  
The National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration Regulations require  
that a Certification label be affixed  
to a vehicle and prescribe where the  
Certification label may be located.  
The Certification label is located on  
the front door latch pillar on the  
drivers side.  
268  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Vehicle identification number (VIN)  
The vehicle identification number is  
attached to a metal tag and is  
located on the driver side  
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
instrument panel. (Please note that  
in the graphic XXXX is  
representative of your vehicle  
identification number.)  
1. World manufacturer identifier  
2. Brake type and gross vehicle  
weight rating (GVWR)  
3. Vehicle line, series, body type  
4. Engine type  
5. Check digit  
6. Model year  
7. Assembly plant  
8. Production sequence number  
Engine number  
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification  
number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and  
transfer case (if equipped).  
269  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
Accessories  
FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE  
A wide selection of genuine Ford accessories are available for your  
vehicle through your local authorized Ford, Lincoln, Mercury or Ford of  
Canada dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically  
engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to  
complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In  
addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets  
or exceeds Fords rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford  
Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Ford  
accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or  
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component  
damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for  
whichever provides you the greatest benefit:  
12 months or 20,000 km (12,000 miles) (whichever occurs first), or  
the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.  
This means that genuine Ford accessories purchased along with your new  
vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of your  
New Vehicles Limited Warranty 3 years or 60,000 km (36,000 miles)  
(whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the  
warranty.  
Not all accessories are available for all models.  
Vehicle Security  
Remote keyless entry  
Styled wheel protector locks  
Vehicle security systems  
Comfort and convenience  
Cargo organizers  
Cargo storage bin  
Cargo trays  
Cell phone holder  
Engine block heaters  
Manual sliding rear window  
Power sliding rear window  
Tire step  
270  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
Travel equipment  
Adjustable Towing System  
Auto headlamp system with Daytime Running Lights (DRL)  
Battery Warmer  
Bed Tent  
Box Aluminum Rack cargo storage systems (Trac Rac)  
Daytime running lights (DRL)  
Electrochromic inside mirror with compass  
Electrochromic inside mirror with compass and temperature display  
Fog lights  
Highway safety and first aid kit  
Off road lights  
Pickup box rails  
ROC2 hitch mounted bike courier  
Running boards and tubular running bars  
Running boards diamond plate  
Seatback organizer  
Speed control  
Towing mirrors  
Trailer hitch, Class IV &  
Trailer hitch bars and balls  
Trailer hitch mounted bike carrier  
Trailer hitch wiring adaptor  
Trailer wiring harness  
Trailgate table  
Protection and appearance equipment  
Air bag anti-theft locks  
All weather vinyl floor mats  
Bed mat  
Bed hooks  
Bed mats  
271  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
Bedliners  
Carpet floor mats  
Cap (hard, color keyed Leer supplier branded)  
Cap (commercial Leer supplier branded)  
Cleaners, waxes and polishes  
Diamond plate bed rail caps  
Diamond plate front box protection  
Diamond plate splash guards  
Diamond plate tool box  
Door edge guards  
Fender flares  
Flat splash guards  
Front end covers (full)  
Hood deflectors  
Leather wrap steering wheel  
Locking gas cap  
Lubricants and oils  
Molded splash guards  
Rear window deflector  
Side window air deflectors  
Spare tire lock  
Stainless steel grill insert  
Step bumpers  
Tailgate covers (Diamond plate)  
Tonneau cover (soft)  
Tonneau cover (hard, color keyed Leer supplier branded)  
Touch-up paint  
Truck cover (full vehicle)  
Universal floor mats  
Wheels  
Wheel covers  
272  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
Wood trim - interim applique  
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in  
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:  
When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your  
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of  
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety  
compliance certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight  
information.  
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio  
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile  
communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and  
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such  
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC  
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service  
technician.  
Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your  
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive  
use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may  
cause the engine to stumble or stall or cause the transmission to be  
damaged or operate improperly. In addition, such systems may be  
damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your  
vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and  
other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily  
affect your vehicles operation.)  
Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage  
that may result from the use of such equipment.  
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and  
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a  
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not  
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more  
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under  
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt  
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in  
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal  
injury and death.  
273  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Index  
A
acid, treating emergencies .....221  
jumping a disabled battery ....192  
maintenance-free ....................221  
replacement, specifications ...253  
servicing ..................................221  
Accessory delay ..........................53  
Air bag supplemental restraint  
system ..........................................90  
and child safety seats ..............92  
description ................................90  
disposal ......................................94  
driver air bag ............................92  
indicator light ...........................94  
operation ...................................92  
passenger air bag .....................92  
passenger deactivation  
switch ........................................95  
Air cleaner filter ...............246, 253  
Ambulance packages ....................8  
Antifreeze (see Engine  
coolant) .....................................223  
BeltMinder ...................................85  
Brakes ........................................115  
anti-lock ...................................115  
anti-lock brake system (ABS)  
warning light ...........................115  
fluid, checking and adding ....239  
fluid, refill capacities ..............254  
fluid, specifications .........257, 260  
lubricant specifications ..257, 260  
parking ....................................116  
shift interlock ..........................118  
Bulbs ............................................42  
Anti-lock brake system  
(see Brakes) ..............................115  
C
Audio system  
Calculating load ........................146  
Capacities for refilling fluids ....254  
Cassette tape player ...................27  
CD changer .................................31  
CD-single premium .........19, 21, 23  
Cell phone use ............................59  
Certification Label ....................268  
AM/FM .......................................19  
Audio system  
(see Radio) ................19, 21, 23, 27  
Automatic transmission ............118  
driving an automatic  
overdrive .........................119, 122  
fluid, adding ............................241  
fluid, checking ........................241  
fluid, refill capacities ..............254  
fluid, specification ..................260  
Child safety restraints ................99  
child safety belts ......................99  
Child safety seats ......................102  
attaching with tether straps ..106  
in front seat ............................104  
in rear seat ..............................104  
Auxiliary power point .................52  
Axle  
lubricant specifications ..257, 260  
refill capacities ........................254  
traction lok ..............................117  
Cleaning your vehicle  
engine compartment ..............209  
instrument panel ....................211  
interior .....................................211  
interior trim ............................211  
B
Battery .......................................221  
274  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
plastic parts ............................210  
safety belts ..............................211  
washing ....................................208  
waxing .....................................208  
wheels ......................................209  
wiper blades ............................210  
D
Daytime running lamps  
(see Lamps) ................................39  
Dipstick  
automatic transmission  
fluid ..........................................241  
engine oil .................................218  
Clock adjust  
AM/FM .......................................19  
Clutch  
Doors  
fluid ..........................................240  
operation while driving ..........124  
recommended shift speeds ....125  
lubricant specifications ..........257  
Driveline universal joint and  
slip yoke ....................................245  
Compass, electronic ....................61  
calibration .................................63  
set zone adjustment .................62  
Driving under special  
conditions ..................124, 137, 140  
sand .........................................139  
snow and ice ...........................141  
through water .................139, 144  
Console ........................................59  
overhead ....................................50  
Coolant  
E
checking and adding ..............223  
refill capacities ................226, 254  
specifications ..................257, 260  
Emergencies, roadside  
jump-starting ..........................192  
Cruise control  
(see Speed control) ....................56  
Emergency Flashers .................175  
Emission control system ..........236  
Customer Assistance ................174  
Ford accessories for your  
vehicle .....................................213  
Ford Extended Service  
Plan ..........................................201  
Getting assistance outside the  
U.S. and Canada .....................205  
Getting roadside assistance ...174  
Getting the service you  
need .........................................199  
Ordering additional owners  
literature .................................206  
The Dispute Settlement  
Engine ........................................260  
cleaning ...................................209  
coolant .....................................223  
diesel ...........................................7  
fail-safe coolant ......................227  
idle speed control ...................221  
lubrication  
specifications ..................257, 260  
refill capacities ........................254  
service points ..........................217  
starting after a collision .........175  
Engine block heater .................114  
Board .......................................201  
Utilizing the  
Mediation/Arbitration  
Program ...................................204  
Engine oil ..................................218  
checking and adding ..............218  
dipstick ....................................218  
275  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
filter, specifications ........220, 253  
recommendations ...................220  
refill capacities ........................254  
specifications ..................257, 260  
G
Garage door opener ....................50  
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............231  
Gas mileage  
(see Fuel economy) .................233  
Gauges .........................................15  
transmission fluid  
temperature gauge ...................19  
Exhaust fumes ..........................114  
F
Fail safe cooling ........................227  
Fluid capacities .........................254  
Foglamps .....................................39  
GAWR  
(Gross Axle Weight Rating) .....145  
calculating ...............................146  
definition .................................145  
driving with a heavy load ......145  
location ....................................145  
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......129  
description ..............................133  
driving off road .......................135  
electronic shift ................129, 133  
indicator light .........................130  
lever operated shift ................130  
manual locking hubs ..............129  
preparing to drive your  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight  
Rating) .......................................145  
calculating .......................145146  
definition .................................145  
driving with a heavy load ......145  
location ....................................145  
vehicle .....................................117  
Fuel ............................................229  
calculating fuel economy .......233  
cap ...........................................231  
capacity ...................................254  
choosing the right fuel ...........231  
comparisons with EPA fuel  
economy estimates .................236  
detergent in fuel .....................232  
filling your vehicle  
H
Hazard flashers .........................175  
Headlamps ...................................38  
aiming ........................................40  
autolamp system .......................38  
daytime running lights .............39  
flash to pass ..............................40  
high beam .................................39  
replacing bulbs ...................4344  
turning on and off ....................38  
with fuel ..................229, 231, 233  
filter, specifications ........233, 253  
fuel pump shut-off switch .....175  
improving fuel economy ........233  
octane rating ...................232, 260  
quality ......................................232  
running out of fuel .................232  
safety information relating to  
Heating  
heating and air conditioning  
system .................................3536  
Hood ..........................................216  
automotive fuels .....................229  
I
Fuel pump shut-off switch .......175  
Fuses ..................................176177  
Ignition ...............................110, 260  
276  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Infant seats  
GAWR ......................................145  
GVWR ......................................145  
trailer towing ..........................145  
(see Safety seats) .....................102  
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)  
testing ........................................238  
Loading instructions .................146  
Instrument panel  
Locks  
cleaning ...................................211  
cluster ........................................12  
lighting up panel and  
autolock .....................................71  
childproof ..................................66  
Lubricant specifications ...257, 260  
Lumbar support, seats ...............76  
interior .......................................40  
J
M
Jump-starting your vehicle ......192  
Manual transmission .................124  
fluid capacities ........................254  
lubricant specifications ..........260  
reverse .....................................126  
Message center ...........................59  
english/metric button ...............60  
menu button .............................60  
Mirrors .........................................50  
fold away ...................................55  
heated ........................................54  
side view mirrors (power) .......53  
Moon roof ....................................51  
Motorcraft parts ................233, 253  
K
Keyless entry system  
autolock .....................................71  
Keys  
positions of the ignition .........110  
L
Lamps  
autolamp system .......................38  
bulb replacement  
specifications chart ..................42  
cargo lamps ...............................40  
daytime running light ...............39  
fog lamps ...................................39  
headlamps .................................38  
headlamps, flash to pass ..........40  
instrument panel, dimming .....40  
interior lamps .....................4142  
replacing bulbs ...................4247  
O
Octane rating ............................232  
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................218  
Overdrive .....................................49  
P
Lane change indicator  
Parking brake ............................116  
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....253  
(see Turn signal) ........................41  
Lights, warning and indicator ....12  
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........115  
speed control ............................58  
Pedals (see Power adjustable  
foot pedals) .................................56  
Power adjustable foot pedals .....56  
Load limits .................................145  
277  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Power distribution box  
(see Fuses) ...............................177  
Seat belts (see Safety  
restraints) ....................................77  
Power door locks ..................65, 71  
Power point .................................52  
Power steering ..........................117  
fluid, checking and adding ....239  
fluid, refill capacity ................254  
fluid, specifications .........257, 260  
Seats ............................................72  
child safety seats ....................102  
cleaning ...................................212  
Servicing your vehicle ..............215  
Snowplowing .................8, 170172  
Spare tire  
(see Changing the Tire) ...........182  
Power Windows ...........................52  
Preparing to drive your  
vehicle ........................................117  
Spark plugs,  
specifications .....................253, 260  
Special notice ................................9  
ambulance conversions ..............8  
diesel-powered vehicles .............7  
four-wheel drive vehicles 172173  
utility-type vehicles ....................7  
R
Radio ..........................19, 21, 23, 27  
AM/FM .......................................19  
Specification chart,  
Relays ........................................176  
lubricants ...........................257, 260  
Remote entry system .................67  
illuminated entry ......................70  
locking/unlocking doors ...........65  
Speed control ..............................56  
Starting your vehicle .......110111,  
113  
jump starting ..........................192  
Reverse sensing system ...........127  
Roadside assistance ..................174  
Steering wheel  
tilting .........................................49  
S
Stereo  
AM/FM .......................................19  
Safety Belt Maintenance ............89  
Safety belts (see Safety  
restraints) ..................77, 7981, 83  
T
Tailgate ........................................64  
Tilt steering wheel ......................49  
Safety defects, reporting ..........207  
Safety restraints ..............77, 7983  
belt minder ...............................85  
extension assembly ..................89  
for adults .............................7981  
for children ...............................99  
lap belt ......................................84  
safety belt maintenance ...........89  
warning light and chime ..........85  
Tires ...................................247248  
changing ..........................182, 184  
checking the pressure ............248  
replacing ..................................251  
rotating ....................................249  
snow tires and chains ............252  
tire grades ...............................248  
treadwear ................................247  
Safety seats for children ..........102  
278  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Towing .......................................146  
trailer towing ..........................146  
wrecker ....................................197  
Traction-lok rear axle ...............117  
Transfer case  
fluid checking .........................245  
Vehicle Identification Number  
(VIN) ..........................................269  
Vehicle loading ..........................145  
Ventilating your vehicle ...........114  
W
Transmission  
automatic operation .........49, 118  
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....118  
fluid, checking and adding  
Warning lights (see Lights)  
Washer fluid  
.......12  
..............................218  
(automatic) .............................241  
fluid, checking and adding  
Water, Driving through  
.............144  
(manual) .................................244  
fluid, refill capacities ..............254  
lubricant specifications ..257, 260  
manual operation ....................124  
Windows  
power  
.........................................52  
Windshield washer fluid and  
wipers  
Turn signal ..................................41  
..........................................48  
checking and adding fluid  
.....218  
V
replacing wiper blades  
.............48  
Wrecker towing  
.........................197  
Vehicle dimensions ...................260  
279  
2003 F250/350/450/550 (f23)  
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)  
USA English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Echo Blower PB 500H User Manual
Exido Ventilation Hood 258 014 User Manual
Extron electronic Network Card AC AAP User Manual
Faber Ventilation Hood Cabinet Rangehood User Manual
Fellowes Paper Shredder 460Ms User Manual
Festool Cordless Saw PD561438 User Manual
Fostex Recording Equipment XR 3 User Manual
Furman Sound Music Pedal SPB 8 8E User Manual
GE Cooktop 164D3333P235 User Manual
GE Washer WASE4220 User Manual